Simocode Manual

System Manual Version 10/2004
Totally I n t e gr a t e d Automation
sirius
SIMOCODE pro
MOTOR MANAGEMENT
Important Notes, Table of Contents System Description Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Motor Protection Motor Control Monitoring Functions
System Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 A B C D
SIMOCODE pro
Outputs Inputs Standard Function Blocks Logic Modules Communication Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces Commissioning and Servicing Tables Data Formats and Data Records Dimension Drawings
Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Technical Data
Edition 10/2004
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to avoid property damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol.
Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Caution used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Caution used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage. Notice used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.
When several danger levels apply, the notices of the highest level (lower number) are always displayed. If a notice refers to personal damages with the safety alert symbol, then another notice may be added warning of property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this documentation. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on the equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to earth, and to tag circuits, equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Intended Use
Please note the following:
Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks
All designations marked with are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this documentation might be trademarks which, if used by third parties for their purposes, might infringe upon the rights of the proprietors.
Copyright Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved Reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in the manual are reviewed regularly, and any necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuremberg (Germany)
Siemens AG 2004 Technical data subject to change
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
A5E00248055-02
Table of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.6 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.7.7 1.8 1.8.1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist for selecting the device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating, service and diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional signal processing with freely programmable logic modules Overview of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current measurement modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-13 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-19 1-19 1-20 1-21 1-22 1-23 1-25 1-26 1-27 1-27 2-1
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction and target of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station . . . . . . . . Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP .
. 2-2 . 2-3 . 2-6 . 2-10 3-1
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . Overload protection . . . Asymmetry monitoring . Blocking protection . . . Temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 3-2 . 3-4 . 3-9 . 3-10 . 3-11 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-5
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes of operation and mode selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Table of Contents
4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10 4.2.11 4.2.12 4.2.13 4.2.14 4.2.15 4.2.16 4.3
Enables and enabled control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General settings and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Star-delta starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Star-delta starters with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole-changing switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal of the control functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 4-9 4-10 4-10 4-13 4-16 4-17 4-19 4-22 4-25 4-28 4-32 4-35 4-38 4-41 4-44 4-46 4-51 4-53
. . .4-56 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-9 6-1
5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal earth fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current limit monitoring . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I> (upper limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I< (lower limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating hours monitoring . . . . . . . . Stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the number of starts . . . . . measurement module . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . Basic unit (BU) . . . . Operator panel (OP) . Digital modules (DM) Cyclic signaling . . . . Acyclic signaling . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
. 6-2 . 6-4 . 6-6 . 6-8 . 6-10 . 6-12 7-1 7-2 7-4 7-6 7-8
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . Basic unit (BU) . . . . Digital modules (DM) Cyclic controlling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .
SIMOCODE pro
ii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Table of Contents
7.5 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.9.1 9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 10
Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test/reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test position feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . Response for slider control function . . . . . . . . . Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . Power failure monitoring (UVO . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog (bus monitoring, PLC/DCS monitoring) . Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time stamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-7 8-9 8-11 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-15 8-16 8-18 8-18 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-10 9-13 9-16 9-19 9-20 9-21
Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . Truth table for 3I/1O . . Truth table for 2I/1O . . Truth table for 5I/2O . . Counters . . . . . . . . . Timer . . . . . . . . . . . Signal conditioner . . . Non-volatile elements . Flashing . . . . . . . . . Flickering . . . . . . . . Limit monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 10-2 . 10-2 . 10-4 . 10-6 . 10-6 . 10-8 . 10-8 . 10-9 . 10-10 . 10-11 . 10-11 . 10-12 . 10-13 . 10-15 . 10-15 . 10-16 . 10-17 . 10-18 . 10-19 . 10-20
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Transmitting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Configuring SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Configuring with a GSD file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Configuring with the SIMOCODE ES software. . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 Configuring with SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Telegram description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Process image (cyclic data) and data records (acyclic data) . 10.6 Diagnostics with STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.1 Reading out the diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.2 Configuring the slave diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.3 Station status 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.5 Manufacturer's identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.6 Identification-related diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.7 Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.8 Channel-related diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.9 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.10Data records - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iii
Table of Contents
11 11.1 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.4 11.5 12 12.1 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 A A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 B B.1 B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 B.7 B.8
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the basic units and expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detachable terminals for basic units and expansion modules . . . . . . Current measurement with current measurement modules . . . . . . . System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic units, expansion modules and current measurement modules . Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-9 11-10 11-10 11-12 11-14 11-16 11-17
Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 General information about commissioning and servicing. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS DP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics via LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace SIMOCODE pro components . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the basic factory default setting . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 12-2 . 12-3 . 12-3 . 12-4 . 12-5 . 12-6 . 12-6 . 12-7 . 12-9 . 12-10 A-1
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status signals/messages for the control functions . Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket assignment table - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket assignment table - analog . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. A-2 . A-3 . A-4 . A-11 . A-13 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-14 B-15 B-16 B-22
Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing/reading data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data record 67 - process image of the outputs . . Data record 69 - process image of the inputs. . . . Data record 92 - device diagnostics . . . . . . . . . Data record 94 - measured values . . . . . . . . . . Data record 95 - Service/statistics data . . . . . . . Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 . . . . . Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 (plug) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro
iv
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Table of Contents
B.9 B.10 B.11 B.12 B.13 B.14 B.15 B.16 C C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2 C.2 C.2.1 C.2.2 C.2.3 C.2.4 C.2.5 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.5.1 D D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
record record record record record record record record
DS132 - extended device parameter 1 . . 133 - extended device parameter 2 (plug) 139 - labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 - communication parameters . . . . . 165 - comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 - Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . 203 - Acyclic signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 - password protection . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
. . . . . . . .
B-26 B-34 B-37 B-38 B-38 B-39 B-40 B-41 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6
Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7 000 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7 010 basic unit. . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF710 current measurement module . . . . . . . . . . . . Current measurement module (push-through converter) 3UF7 100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7 101, 2.4 A up to 25 A. . . . Current measurement module (push-through converter) 3UF7 102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current measurement module (push-through converter) 3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current measurement module (rail connection) 3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current measurement module (rail connection) 3UF7 104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF7 200 operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF7 3 digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .
.. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
. C-7 . C-8 . C-9 . C-10 . C-10 D-1 D-2 D-3 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion modules (digital modules) . . . . . . . . . . Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .
Index
Table of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
vi
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Important Notes
Purpose of the manual The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor management system and its functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing-motor application as an example. This manual contains information specific to service and maintenance personnel in addition to assistance in fault detecting and elimination when a fault occurs. The manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings, and technical data about the system components to help with the configuration. Required basic knowledge A basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution, digital circuit engineering and automisation technology is required in order to be able to understand this manual. Topics The manual consists of chapters that can be consulted and the following table contains a list of the relevant topics. The topics with a gray background represent the contents of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization and service software.
Topic System Description Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Motor Protection Motor Control Monitoring Functions Inputs Outputs Standard Function Blocks Logic Modules Communication Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces Commissioning and Servicing Target group Configurators, planers Configurators, technicians and commissioners Configurators, commissioners Configurators Configurators, commissioners, service personnel Configurators Configurators Configurators Configurators Configurators, PLC programmers Technicians, electricians, maintenance and service personnel Commissioners, electricians, maintenance and service personnel
vii
Scope of application This manual is applicable for the components included in the SIMOCODE pro system. It contains a description of the components that are applicable at the time of printing the document. We reserve the right to include information about new components or new versions of components in an additional document. Further documentation
Please read the operating manuals of the corresponding components. The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual.
Definitions
If SIMOCODE pro is referred to, then both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V series are meant.
Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro Using SIMOCODE, specific responses (deactivated, signal, warn, switch off) can be parameterized for various functions (e.g. overload). They are also displayed in the following table: X = applicable - = not applicable d = default
Response Switch off Warn Signal Not active Delay Function 1 X (d) X X 25 s Function 2 X (d) X X X Function 3 X X (d) -
Short description of the response Deactivated: The corresponding function is switched off, no signals are generated. Signal: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further processed in any way. Warn: A warning signal, which is available as a diagnostic for PROFIBUS DP is , generated in addition to the device-internal signal. Switch off: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is generated which is available as a diagnostic for PROFIBUS DP The error mes. sage and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged. A delay time can also be specified for specific responses.
viii
Correction sheet A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to fill in suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back to us. This helps us to improve the next edition.
Exclusion of liability The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe switching off. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the safe functioning of the complete plant or machine. Siemens AG, its subsiduries and associated companies (hereon referred to as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are given or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description.
ix
SIMOCODE GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g. characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V device series simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro a function overview an overview of the system components. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: planners and configurators people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional information about SIMOCODE pro system integrators/process technology. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: basic knowledge about load feeders basic knowledge about motor protection basic knowledge of control engineering basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
1-1
System Description
1.1
Description
Introduction
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP system. SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching and protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed. The system protects and monitors the motor feeder independently of the automation system. SIMOCODE pro makes the motor feeder controllable in an easy way and also automatically implements all the necessary interlockings. It provides a lot of operating, service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the motor feeder more transparent. It integrates the motor feeder completely into a main automation system via PROFIBUS DP .
Device series SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different functions: SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for direct and reversing starters and SIMOCODE pro V - the variable system which also offers many other additional functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters - each also in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and sliders. SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. Its functionality can be extended if required, e.g. the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are adjustable, new types can be added a current/voltage measurement module can be used for additional voltage measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power management) a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors another earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current transformer an analog module extends the system by an additional analog input and output, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. This means that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant.
SIMOCODE pro
1-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
Independent operation SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of the automation system. Thus, if the automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder can still be operated. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP . This can, for example, be connected later. Typical configuration The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro C Current measurement module (IM) Operator panel (OP)
Basic unit (BU1)
Maximum configuration
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2) Digital module (DM) Analog module (AM)
Current measurement module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
UF-01129
Additional optional expansions are possible

Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro
UF-01130
1-3
System Description
1.2
Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for all the control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The following components must be used and the following wiring must be carried out: inserting and wiring up the overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers, analog/digital converters wiring up the control circuit connecting the control devices for start/stop bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches wiring up the interlocks The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:
Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V 1L1 L1 -F4 L2 L3 N PE -Q1 1 3 5 Q1 -F3 2 4 6 - K1 1 3 5 2 4 6 -X1 -K11 Manual -X2 1 3 5 - F2 2 4 6 Local stop S1 Local start 2 4...20 mA S2 1 -K1 1N PLC Start/stop -K1 -K12 OFF ON -F2-
Automation level / I/O module Feedback Thermistor Overload -Q1 open Current Control commands Man. / aut. -K11 -X3 -K1 1 Switchgear -K1 -F2 -F3 -Q1 D A -F3 Thermistor evaluation 2 N ON / OFF -K12
Automatic
PE
UVW M 3~
Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
SIMOCODE pro
1-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. This offers the following advantages: additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers, analog/digital converters are not necessary wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. The auxiliary contact for locking is no longer necessary The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V L1 L2 L3 N PE
PROFIBUS DP L+
L1/L+
1 3 5 Q1
F11
Control station local control [LC]
2 4 6
S0 Current measurment module (IM) A1 A2 IN1
S1 IN2 24 V
Basic unit (BU)
T1
T2
OUT 1 K1
1 3 5 - K1 2 4 6
N/L
PE
U V W
T1
M 3~
Thermistor
T2
Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
1-5
System Description
1.3
Application example
The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and outputted as an analog signal. If the fill level sinks below a certain level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE. Liquid is pumped in until the reference value is again reached. Then the pump is switched off.
Description
Controlling the pump The pump can be controlled as follows: locally: control station - local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by visual inspection) in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for switching on and off manually in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled switching on and off (automatic operation) via SIMOCODE, by means of internal logic modules Schematic
Control station PLC/DCS [DP]
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V L1 L2 L3 N PE
PLC/DCS PROFIBUS DP L+
Fill-level indicator L1/L+
1 3 5 Q1 F11 Control station local control [LC]
2 4 6 Current measurement module (IM) System interface A1 A2
S0
S1
Liquid container
IN1
IN2
24 V
Basic unit (BU 2)
In+ Control station In Analog module (AM) Operator panel
Connecting cable T1 T2
OUT 1
K1
Out+
Out Display Motor current
- K1
1 3 5 2 4 6
N/L
Pump PE U V W T1 M 3~ T2 Thermistor
Optional: Laptop with SIMOCODE ES
Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example
SIMOCODE pro
1-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
Record, display and evaluate the measured values The following measured values are required for monitoring the process: pump motor current, which is measured by the current measurement module analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog module The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro or transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS and are evaluated there. Optionally, e.g. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.
1-7
System Description
1.4
Checklist for selecting the device series

The following checklist should help you decide on the best device series for your requirements:
SIMOCODE pro Requirement pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs) with control functions for direct starters, reversing starters, intelligent overload relays Monitoring of blocking, asymmetry, phase failure Current measurement, current limit monitoring, overload protection Earth-fault monitoring via current measurement module (internal) Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)
1)
1)
1)
1)
Motor feeder with control function: star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters each also possible in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation , valves, sliders Measuring, processing and outputting analog values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc. Current measurement and voltage measurement Voltage monitoring for undervoltage Power management, implementing power considerations (power, power factor), power monitoring More than 4 digital inputs required (maximum 12)
Table 1-1: Checklist for selecting the device series
1)
2)
3)
3)
3)
2)
1) via current measurement module 2) with expansion modules 3) via current/voltage measurement modules
SIMOCODE pro
1-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
SIMOCODE pro Requirement pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
More than 3 relay outputs required (maximum 7) Earth-fault monitoring with a summation current transformer Binary inputs for 110 ... 240 V AC/DC (max. 8) Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)
2)
2)
2)
Analog temperature monitoring with PTC, NTC, PT100, PT1000 and KTY sensor types
Table 1-1: Checklist for selecting the device series (cont.)
2)
2)
1) via current measurement module 2) with expansion modules 3) via current/voltage measurement modules
1-9
System Description
1.5
1.5.1
Function overview
Protecting For a more detailed description, please see chapter 3 Motor Protection
Electronic overload protection The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection: overload protection phase asymmetry phase failure Blocking protection Please see chapter 3 "Motor Protection" Thermistor motor protection The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature. 1.5.2 Monitoring
Earth-fault monitoring The basic units have Internal earth-fault monitoring: For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from the total current. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with a low impedance. The internal earth-fault monitoring can be activated through parameterization. It covers 2 operating cases: normal operating case up to 2 x Ie. The effective operating current must be smaller than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 30% of the set current Ie will be detected. start-up or overload operation from 2 x Ie. The effective operating current is larger than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 15% of the effective motor current will be detected. Note If you use the internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to false trippings. For delta operation, the summation current is nonzero due to harmonics.
SIMOCODE pro
1-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
External earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V: the earth-fault module (EM) is needed to connect an external summation current transformer (e.g 3UL22). Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are evaluated by the 3UL22 summation current transformer. A warning is triggered if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set additional trippings through parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts either by turning off the contactor controls QE* or with a warning depending on which configuration you set. Current limit monitoring The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring. Impending irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty filter on a pump or a motor mounting which is running more and more sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn-out. Voltage monitoring SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring. A three-phase current network or a one-phase network can be monitored for undervoltage, direction of rotation (for three-phase current) or availability. Temperature monitoring The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of implementing an analog temperature monitoring of up to 3 sensor measuring circuits. Monitoring active power SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of monitoring the active power, where not only the current, but also the power factor (cos phi) is taken into account. Monitoring the power factor (cos phi)
For monitoring the operating status of the motor For detecting no-load operation for motors with low power (load rejection)
Monitoring analog signals SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of reading, processing and monitoring analog signals. The analog values can be transmitted to the automation system or processed/evaluated in SIMOCODE. Any analog signal can be outputted via the analog output.
1-11
System Description
Monitoring operating hours, stop time and number of start-ups SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear out) or they were stopped too long a period of time. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature aging, the number of motor startups in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings. All signals can be processed internally (limits) and/or registered by the bus. Control functions Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are available:
SIMOCODE Control function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Overload relays Direct starters Reversing starters Circuit breakers Star-delta starters, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation Dahlander, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation Pole-changing switches, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation Valves Sliders Soft starters, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation
1) 1) 1) 1)
1) Due to of additional requirements (e.g. power measurement), it may be necessary to select the BU2 device version.
Table 1-2: Control functions
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly adapted and extended.
SIMOCODE pro
1-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.5.3
Communication
PROFIBUS DP SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units). SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
SIMOCODE Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s Automatic baud rate recognition Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1) Warnings according to DPV1 Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
1.5.4
Standard function modules Standard function modules are predefined functions which can simply be activated, e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following standard function modules:
SIMOCODE Standard function modules pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Number Test Reset Test position feedback (TPF) External fault Operational protection off (OPO) Power failure monitoring (UVO) Emergency start Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) Timestamping
Table 1-4: Standard function modules
Number 2 3 1 6 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 4 1 1
1-13
System Description
1.5.5
Operating, service and diagnostic data SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of operating, service and diagnostic data:
Operating data
motor switching state all phase currents all phase voltages phase asymmetry phase cycle motor power/cos phi time to trip motor temperature remaining cooling down time etc.
Service data Among other things, SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for maintaining relevant data: motor operating hours motor stop times number of motor starts number of overload trippings internal comments saved in the device reason for switching off signals warnings faults etc. Diagnostic data
numerous detailed early warning signals and fault signals device-internal error protocolling with timestamp etc.
SIMOCODE pro
1-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.5.6
Additional signal processing with freely programmable logic modules If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the logic modules which can be programmed freely. These can be used, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the device series, the system offers several logic modules which can be parameterized freely:
SIMOCODE Logic module pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Number Truth tables 3 inputs/ 1 output Truth tables 2 inputs/ 1 output Truth tables 5 inputs/ 2 outputs Timers Counters Signal conditioners Non-volatile elements Flashing Flickering Limit monitor
Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
Number 6 2 1 4 4 4 4 3 3 4
3 2 2 2 2 3 3
1-15
System Description
1.6
Devices
Overview of system components
SIMOCODE pro Connectable system components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
Operator panel (OP)
Installation in the cabinet door. Additional control station and display. With system interface for connecting a PC Current measurement with pushthrough system. Basic unit can be snapped open Current measurement with pushthrough system or a rail connection system Current measurement with a rail connection system Mounting only next to the basic unit, otherwise similar to the current measurement modules, also: - voltage measurement - power measurement - power factor (cos phi) measurement - phase cycle
Current measurement modules (IM) 0.3 A up to 3 A 2.4 A up to 25 A Current measurement modules (IM) 10 A up to 100 A Current measurement modules (IM) 20 A up to 200 A
Current measurement modules (IM) 63 A up to 630 A
Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) * 0.3 A up to 3 A 2.4 A up to 25 A Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) * 10 A up to 100 A Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) * 20 A up to 200 A Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) * 63 A up to 630 A
Table 1-6: System components, devices
SIMOCODE pro
1-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
SIMOCODE pro Connectable system components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
Digital modules (DM) 24 V DC monostable 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monostable 24 V DC bistable 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable Analog module (AM) *
Additional binary inputs and outputs. Maximum 2 DMs possible Additional inputting and outputting as well as monitoring of analog values For connecting a 3UL22 external summation current transformer for earth-fault monitoring For monitoring temperature via additional Pt100, PT1000, KTY... sensors
Earth-fault module (EM) *
Temperature module (TM) *
Available from the middle of 2005
Table 1-6: System components, devices (cont.)
1-17
System Description
Accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit Connectable system components pro C pro V Application
Connecting cable in 4 different lengths ranging from 0.025 m up to 2m System interface cover
For connecting system components via system interfaces For covering system interfaces not in use For saving the device parameters. In the case of device replacement, parameterization without a PC For configuring the PROFIBUS DP address without a PC For connecting SIMOCODE pro to a PC For leading out the system interface e.g. from a switchgear cabinet
Memory module
Addressing plug
PC cable
Door adapter
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
Software For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing

SIMOCODE basic unit Software components pro C pro V Application
SIMOCODE ES Smart
Access via the system interface on the device Access via the system interface on the device and PROFIBUS DP Graphical parameterization per Drag&Drop
SIMOCODE ES Professional with Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE ES Graphic *
Available from the middle of 2005
Table 1-8: System components, software
SIMOCODE pro
1-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7
1.7.1
Description of the system components

Basic units The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detachable terminals:
Basic unit 1 (BU1) SIMOCODE pro C device series Basic unit 2 (BU2) SIMOCODE pro V device series
Figure 1-5: Basic units
Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series. The following motor control functions are supported: direct starters and reversing starters circuit breaker activation Basic unit 2 (BU2) Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following motor control functions are supported: direct starters and reversing starters star-delta starters, also with reversal of the direction of rotation 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches), also with reversal of the direction of rotation 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversal of the direction of rotation slide control valve control circuit breaker control soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
1-19
System Description
Basic unit 2 offers the following options: increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of 22.5 mm width using a current/voltage measurement module instead of the current measurement module used additional inputs and outputs if necessary 1.7.2 Operator panel (OP) The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control centers. It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C device series as well as with the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs which are on the basic units, the test/reset button and makes the system interface externally available. It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. For this, the operator panel is equipped with 5 buttons, of which 4 can be parameterized freely 10 LEDs, of which 7 can be parameterized freely The following figure shows an operator panel:
Operator panel Device series SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 1-6: Operator panel
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion module via the system interface on the back. The voltage is supplied by the basic unit. A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front (with a cover for IP54). The power is supplied by the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7.3
Current measurement modules (IM) Current measurement modules are used with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. The current measurement module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measurement modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A. The following figure shows the different current measurement modules:
Current measurement modules Device series SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V 10A - 100A
0.3A - 3A 2.4A - 25A
20A - 200A
63A - 630A
Figure 1-7: Current measurement modules
The current measurement module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current measurement modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measurement modules. The current measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. The current measurement module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments.
1-21
System Description
1.7.4
Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device series The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/ voltage measurement module instead of a current measurement module. As well as the motor current, current/voltage measurement modules can also monitor voltages up to 690 V evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi) monitor the phase cycle The following figure shows the different current/voltage measurement modules:
Current/ voltage measurement modules Monitoring voltages up to 690 V Device series SIMOCODE pro V 10A - 100A
0.3A - 3A 2.4A - 25A
20A - 200A
63A - 630A
Figure 1-8: Current/voltage measurement modules
The current/voltage measurement module is connected to the basic device via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage measurement modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The current/voltage measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. Mounting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/ voltage measurement modules up to 630 A. Basic units can only be mounted separately next to the current/voltage measurement modules.
SIMOCODE pro
1-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7.5
Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are available: digital modules (DM) analog module (AM) earth-fault module (EM) temperature module (TM) All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and detachable terminals. The following figure shows an expansion module:
Expansion module Device series SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 1-9: Expansion module
Digital modules (DM) Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit 2, if required. For basic unit 2, the following digital modules are available:
Inputs Supply 24 V DC, external Outputs 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs
110 ... 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay outputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
110 ... 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Table 1-9: Variations of the digital modules
A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2, whereby all versions listed here can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.
1-23
System Description
Analog module (AM) The analog module offers the option of expanding basic unit 2 by an analog input (0/4-20 mA) and one analog output (0/4-20 mA). This makes it possible to read, process and monitor analog signals. The analog values can be processed internally and transmitted to the automation system. Any analog signal of 0/4-20 mA can be outputted via the analog output. 1 analog module can be connected to BU2 Analog input signal 0/4 to 20 mA Analog output signal 0/4 to 20 mA Earth-fault modules (EM) The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with the 3UL22 summation current transformer (makes it possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function, which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can be expanded by an additional and more exact external earth-fault monitoring system. 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2 Temperature module (TM) The temperature module offers the option of expanding the thermistor motor protection for the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (three-wire system) can be evaluated. SIMOCODE pro V supports, among others, the PTC, NTC, KTY sensor types as well as PT100 and PT1000. 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2
Note: All modules can be used/connected in any sequence.
SIMOCODE pro
1-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7.6
Accessories The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device series:
PC cable Addressing plug Device series SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Memory module Door adapter Connecting cable System interface cover
Figure 1-10: Accessories
PC cable for the device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of a basic unit via its serial interface. Memory module for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replacement (for this, see chapter "Replace SIMOCODE pro components" on page 12-9). Addressing plug for the hardware transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit without a PC/programming device. Connecting cable in different lengths (0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m, 2.0 m) which are required for connecting the individual basic units with their current modules and, if necessary, with their expansion modules or operator panel. The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per system! Door adapter for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus guaranteeing fast parameterization. System interface cover to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them. In normal operation, system interfaces which are not used must be closed.
1-25
System Description
1.7.7
Software SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough, time-saving parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:
SIMOCODE ES SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Windows 2000 or Windows XP It is available in 2 versions: . SIMOCODE ES Smart, for directly connecting the PC/programming device (serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface on the device (point to point) SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via PROFIBUS DP and/or with PC cable via the system interface on the device Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configuration. Thus, a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made possible. PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro, SIMOCODE pro can be connected easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (symbols and faceplate) Attention! Please observe the respective system versions! GSD File for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system (automation system). The GSD file is on the SIMOCODE ES CD ROM in the GSD directory. You will find the current German version on the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd (under Schaltgerte, i.e. switchgear). You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the documentation for the automation system. Win SIMOCODE DP Converter is a software tool for converting old Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
1-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.8
1.8.1
Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

Function blocks
Characteristics In the SIMOCODE pro system, there are internal function blocks e.g. for control stations, control functions and motor protection. Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs. The following table shows the possible inputs/outputs:
Input Plugs (digital) Symbol Example Function blocks in the basic unit can have digital plugs. These are connected via software to digital sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog plugs. These are connected via software to analog sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data. Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block BU input Control devices and auxiliary switches are . usually connected there.
DP
Plugs (analog)
Screw terminals
Control data from PROFIBUS DP
From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e.g. function block cyclic control data .
Output Sockets (digital)
Symbol
Example Function blocks in the basic devices can have digital sockets. These are assigned via software to digital plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Function blocks in the basic devices can have sokkets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max. Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block BU output Contactors, for example, are connected . there.
Sockets (analog)
Screw terminals
Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP
DP
From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e.g. function block cyclic signaling data .
Table 1-10: Possible inputs/outputs
1-27
System Description
Schematic of principle structural configuration The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of a SIMOCODE pro basic unit:
BU external
Inputs (terminals) BU input 1 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Cyclic control data Bit 0.0 From the DP Master DP Control function Bit 0.1 Bit 0.2 Function block D Bit 0.1 Bit 0.2 Function block B Bit 0.0 To the DP Master DP 2 3 4 Standard function Cyclic signaling data Standard function Function block C Outputs (sockets) Inputs (plugs)
BU internal
Outputs (sockets) Function block A 1 2 3 4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Inputs (plugs) BU output Outputs (terminals)
Logic function
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP
Figure 1-11: Principal configuration of a SIMOCODE-pro basic unit
Connecting plugs with sockets Note The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to his respective application. *)
Attention! If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized: If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated! *) If you select an application in SIMOCODE ES, e.g. reversing starter, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter

In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter including an example. Most of the parameters are appropriately set as factory defaults for most of the applications. Only a few parameters have to be set. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: planners configurators mechanics electricians commissioners. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see chapter 1 System Description) basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
2-1
2.1
Introduction and target of the example

The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-bystep how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with a local control station and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization. The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.
Introduction
Target of the example This example is intended to 1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps 2. Help you modify this example for your respective application 3. Help you easily implement other applications Important steps The two important steps with SIMOCODE are always:
implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching devices and control and signaling devices) implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE functions, with control and analysis of the SIMOCODE inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE wiring).
Conditions
Load feeder/motor present PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present The main circuit for the reversing circuit including the current measurement module is already wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through the push-through system openings of the current measurement module. PC/programming device is present The SIMOCODE ES software is installed The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. In chapter "Configuring the basic factory default setting" on page 12-10 you will learn how to implement the basic factory default settings.
SIMOCODE pro
2-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
2.2
Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

The following table shows the components that are required for this example:
Item 1 2 3 Ordering data SIMOCODE pro C basic unit (SIMOCODE pro V also possible) Current measurement module 0.3 A up to 3 A Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and the current measurement module, depending on the length SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional software for parameterization via the system interface (also SIMOCODE ES Professional software for parameterization via PROFIBUS and the system interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager possible) PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ programming device PROFIBUS DP cable Order number 3UF7000-1AU00-0 (3UF7000-1AU00-0) 3UF7000-1AU00-0 3UF7000-1AU00-0
Necessary components
3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0
(3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0)
5 6
3UF7000-1AU00-0
Table 2-1: Components needed for the example
2-3
Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit:
Main circuit
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V L1 L2 L3 N PE
Control circuit
L1/L+
1 3 5 Q1
F11
2 4 6 3 push-through system openings
S0 Current measurement module (IM)

System interface
S1
S2 24 V
A1
A2
IN1 IN2 IN3 Basic unit (BU)

System interface
Connecting cable
OUT1
OUT2 1
1 3 5 - K1 2 4 6
- K2
1 3 5 2 4 6
N/L
K1
K2
PE
U V W M 3~
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A CLASS 10 Optional: thermistor
Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control station for the commands LEFT OFF RIGHT. Displays, signals, etc. are not taken into account.
Standard reversing starter
L1/L+
Reversing starter w. SIMOCODE pro

L1/L+
S1
Necessary interlocks and links
F11
S0 A1 S0 K1 S2 K2 A2
S1
S2
IN1
IN2
IN3 24 V
Basic unit (BU) K2 K1
OUT1
K1 K2 K1 K2
OUT2
N/L
N/L
S0: LEFT button S1: OFF button S2: RIGHT button
K1: contactor clockwise rotation K2: contactor counterclockwise rotation
Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter
The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the basic unit.
2-5
2.3
Parameterization
After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils connected, current measurement module integrated in the main circuit), the second step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro. For this you need to know the following points:
Point 1 2 3 4 5 Description Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations and control functions with motor protection. Function blocks have names. Function blocks can have settings, e.g. the control function and the set current. In the example: control function reversing starter and set current 3 A. Function blocks have inputs and outputs. These are clearly designated. You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality: connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets (i.e put the plugs in the sockets) if required, set the values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of control function The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labeled as plugs: The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labeled as sockets: Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors are not activated.
The basics of parameterization
6 7 8
Figure 2-3: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter Parameterization means: 1. Setting values 2. Linking function blocks In the example, this means the following: you must choose the control function reversing starter to implement all interlocks and links in the basic device for the reversing starter. you have to determine the set current Ie in the function block Motor Protection In this case, the set current corresponds to the motor rated current, . here 3 A. the BU - output function block must be connected to the sockets of the control/contactor function block via the software. This means connect BU - output 1 to socket contactor control QE1 (right) connect BU - output 2 to socket contactor control QE2 (left) the plugs of the control/contactors function block must be connected to the sockets of the BU - input function block via the software. This means connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket BU - input 1 connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket BU - input 2 connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket BU - input 3
SIMOCODE pro
Connect digital inputs BU - inputs Control/contactors QE1 1 2 3 ON< QE2 OFF ON> Ie = 3 A Left 2 1 Choose a reversing starter Determine Ie Connect relay outputs BU - outputs Right
Local control station [LC]
Contactor controls
Figure 2-4: Schematic of parameterization in the example
The assignment of the contactor controls QE* depends on the parameterized control function. See chapter 4 "Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal of the control functions"
2-7
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 Description Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device. Choose the control function reversing starter as the application. When you select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later. Under Device configuration select either SIMOCODE pro C or , SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if not present. Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/ asymmetry/ blocking . Set the set current Ie1 to 3A. Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the following settings: contactor control > contactor control QE1. contactor control > contactor control QE2. The relay outputs are connected Control/contactors QE1 to the contactor controls.
QE2 BU - output 1 2
3 4 5
Note: By choosing a preset application (step 2), other presettings might be made when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check the following settings: local control [LC] ON<: BU - input 1 local control [LC] OFF: BU - input 2 local control [LC] ON>: BU - input 3
BU - input Control/contactors 1 2 3 ON< Off ON>
The control station is now connected locally with the digital inputs.
Check if the releases for ON and OFF for the operating mode local2 are set. 7 Parameterization is finished. Store the parameter file on your PC/ programming device using Switchgear > Save.
Table 2-2: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
2-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and start up the reversing starter. To do this, execute the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 Description Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device. Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system interface of the basic unit with the PC cable. Observe the status LEDs on the basic unit. The Device LED must light up green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up. Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e.g. using
Target system > Load in switchgear. Choose the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable. 5 After having transferred the data to the basic device, you will receive the message Download to the switchgear finished successfully .
Table 2-3: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Attention In this example, switching between right and left is only possible via OFF and after expiration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds.
Configuration with local control station is finished The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a functional reversing starter with a local control station. If the wiring and parameterization is correct, the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding buttons are pushed.
2-9
2.4
Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP

In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP You have the option of . using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote control). This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as well as via PLC/ DCS. The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. For this reason, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP .
In this section
Conditions The following conditions must be fulfilled: the motor is switched off the supply voltage for the basic device is switched on. The Device LED must light up green you connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP The PROFIBUS DP inter. face is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket) you have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system. You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the documentation for the automation system. Setting the PROFIBUS DP address First you have to set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. The following option are available: via the addressing plug via SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
2-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Plug the PC cable into the system interface. Start SIMOCODE ES. Open the menu Switchgear > Open online. Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface. Press OK to confirm. Open the dialog Device parameters> Bus parameters. Select the DP address. Save the data in the basic unit with Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set. Confirm the change of the address.
Table 2-4: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 Description Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered. Example address 21: Put the switches 16+4+1 in the ON position . If necessary, pull the PC cable out of the system interface. Plug the addressing plug in the system interface. The Device LED lights up yellow. Briefly press the test/ reset button. The set address is accepted. The Device LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds. Pull the addressing plug from the system interface.
2 3 4 5
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
2-11
Additional internal components of the basic unit The control local control station [LC] is already wired, the external components are connected and the required internal connections have been carried out. The following additional internal components that are already connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required: PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands LEFT OFF , and RIGHT PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local) and the PLC/DCS (remotely) Bit0.5=0: local control station [LC] active Bit0.5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active. The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug) are already connected with the bits (sockets) as factory defaults. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations.
SIMOCODEpro
BU - input
Control stations 1 LEFT 2 3 OFF RIGHT QE1 QE2 1 2
BU - output
Right
Left
PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic control data
Bit0.0
LEFT
Bit0.1
DP
Status ON< OFF ON>
Bit0.0 Bit0.1 Bit0.2
Cyclic signaling data
OFF
Bit0.2
DP
RIGHT
Bit0.5
S1
Figure 2-5: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example
All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data Configuration with PLC/ DCS [DP] control station is finished The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP . The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODE pro
2-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on motor protection. Motor protection includes overload protection asymmetry protection blocking protection thermistor protection. Unlike motor control, motor protection functions in the background All . parameters of the motor protection are explained. They can be active or not depending on the chosen control function. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: configurators commissioners. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro the principle of connecting plugs to sockets knowledge of electrical drive engineering. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under: Device parameters > Motor protection.
3-1
Motor Protection
3.1
Introduction
The motor protection functions overload protection asymmetry protec, tion blocking protection and thermistor protection are explained in the , chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
Description
Schematic diagram The following schematic diagram shows the function circuit diagram of the motor protection functions overload protection asymmetry protection , and blocking protection with optional parameter settings and signals.
Control function/motor protection
Overload protection Set current Ie1 Set current Ie2 Class 5,10, ... 40 Response at pre-warning level See table 3-1 Signal:
- Overload
QE1 Switching off QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Extended parameters: Reset (manual, automatic) Load type (3-ph., 1-ph.) Current Pause time Cooling down time Response at trip level Asymmetry protection Asymmetry protection level See table 3-1 See table 3-1
- Overload + phase failure - Pre-warning overload - Cooling down time active - Pause time active - Emergency start active - Time to switching off (analog) - Heating up motor model (analog) - Remaining cooling down time (analog) - Last tripping current (analog)
- Asymmetry
Blocking protection
Blocking protection level
See table 3-1
- Blocking
Figure 3-1: Motor protection functions
SIMOCODE pro
3-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
Adjustable responses Overload protection Asymmetry protection and Blocking , protection

Response At pre-warning At trip level level X X X (d) 0 ... 25.5 s X X X X (d) At asymmetry level X X X (d) X 0 ... 25.5 s At blocking protection level X X X X (d) 0 ... 25.5 s
Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Delay
Table 3-1: Adjustable responses Overload protection Asymmetry protection and Blocking , protection
3-3
Motor Protection
3.2
Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from class 5 to class 40. Therefore, the switch off time can be adjusted very precisely to the start-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be better used to capacity. The interval up to the overload tripping is also calculated and can be put at the disposal of the control system. After an overload tripping, the remaining cooling down time can be displayed.
Description
Set current Ie1 The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Ie1. This value is listed on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the overload tripping characteristic curve. Range: depends on the desired current measurement module
Set current Ie1 0.3 A up to 2.4 A up to 10 A 20 A 63 A up to up to up to 3A 25 A 100 A 200 A 630 A
Set current Ie2 The current setting Ie2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order to also guarantee suitable overload protection for the second speed as well. Range: depends on the desired current measurement module
Set current Ie2: 0.3 A up to 2.4 A up to 10 A 20 A 63 A up to up to up to 3A 25 A 100 A 200 A 630 A
Attention Please make sure that both current settings are in the same range. Otherwise, you should use an additional 3U18 current transformer.
SIMOCODE pro
3-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
Class The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE must trip cold with the 7.2-fold set current Ie (motor protection according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-ups > Class 10 the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced , (derating), which means that a larger contactor must be used. The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load:
1,15
Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads
Range:
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
3-5
Motor Protection
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for a 2-pole load:
0,85
Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load
Range:
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
Response in case of overload The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of overload: Further information: see Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro in chapter "Important Notes" and the table Responses in chapter 3.1 "Introduction". Attention With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to switch off!
SIMOCODE pro
3-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
Cooling time The cooling down time is the specified time after which an overload tripping can be reset. It is usually five minutes. Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE during this time correspondingly extend the specified time. Range:
Cooling down time: 60 up to 6553.5 seconds
Pause time The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. Due to this, frequent start-ups within a short period of time are possible. The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a pause time:
Motor ON
OFF t Without pause time
Trip limit Overload tripping
t With pause time
Trip limit No overload tripping t Pause time Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time
Attention The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this load! Range:
Pause time: 0 up to 6553.5 seconds
3-7
Motor Protection
Load type You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or 3-phase load. The internal earth-fault detection must be deactivated. The phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically. Range:
Load type: 1-phase, 3-phase
Delay pre-warning The delay parameter is used to determine the interval during which the pre-warning level (1.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no reaction. In case of phase failure or asymmetry > 50%, this pre-warning is already issued at approx. 0.85 x Ie. Reset If the reset parameter is set to automatic the overload overload + , , asymmetry and thermistor faults are acknowledged automatically if the cooling down time has expired if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to specification If the reset parameter is set to automatic the errors must be acknow, ledged by a reset signal: reset button on the basic unit reset button on the operator panel reset standard function modules. For this reason, the reset - input inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via the bus. Range:
Reset: Manual, automatic
SIMOCODE pro
3-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
3.3
Asymmetry monitoring
The extent of the phase asymmetry can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable limit is exceeded. If the phase asymmetry is greater than 50%, a reduction of the tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve takes place automatically since the heat development in motors increases with asymmetric conditions.
Description
Limit The limit of the asymmetry to which SIMOCODE pro is to react when overshot is set here. Range:
Limit: 0 to 100%
Response Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase asymmetry: See Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro in chapter "Important Notes" and the table Responses in chapter 3.1 "Introduction". Asymmetry protection - delay The asymmetry limit must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no reaction.
3-9
Motor Protection
3.4
Blocking protection
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable blocking limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload protection. The blocking protection is only active after the parameterized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for class 10 after 10 seconds. The blocking protection prevents the motor from unnecessary high thermal and mechanical load as well as premature deterioration.
Description
Limit After exceeding the blocking limit, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the specified response. Range:
Limit: 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Response Here you can determine the response to be executed when the blocking limit is exceeded: See Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro in chapter "Important Notes" and the table Responses in chapter 3.1 "Introduction". Delay The delay parameter is used to specify the time interval. The blocking level must constantly be exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there is no reaction.
SIMOCODE pro
3-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
3.5
Temperature monitoring
Temperature monitoring is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor. Temperature monitoring is used for: motors with high switching frequencies converter operation intermittent operation and/or during braking a restricted air supply speeds that are lower than the rated speed In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or in the bearings of the motor.
Description
Characteristic curves SIMOCODE pro provides the option of connecting two completely different types of sensors:
Sensor Type: Binary
R
Temperature monitoring via binary PTC thermistors that can be connected to basic unit 1 or basic unit 2. The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly when the limit temperature is reached.
PTC
Analog
R R
PT / KTY
NTC
Temperature monitoring via analog temperature sensors like NTC, KTY83/84, PT100, PT1000 that are connected to the optional temperature module (T module). They have a characteristic curve that changes almost linearly when the temperature rises. For this reason, separate limits can be set for the warning temperature and the switch off temperature.
Figure 3-5: Characteristic curves of temperature sensors
3-11
Motor Protection
Schematic The following schematic shows the function circuit diagram of temperature monitoring:
Thermistor protection (binary) R Activation (in device configuration) u Response at trip limit Thermistor input BU Response to sensor fault see table 3-2 Signal: Switching off
QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
- Thermistor trip limit see table 3-2 - Thermistor short circuit - Thermistor wire break
Figure 3-6: Temperature monitoring
Thermistor protection, binary response

Overtemperature: Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if the temperature exceeds the trip limit.
Attention With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to switch off!
Sensor error (sensor circuit error): Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if there is a short circuit or a wire break in the thermistor sensor cable.
See also Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro in chapter "Important Notes".

Response Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Trip limit T> X X X Sensor fault X X X X
Table 3-2: Thermistor protection, binary response
SIMOCODE pro
3-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
In this chapter In this chapter you will find information on
control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The following related topics are explained: how control stations, modes of operation and enables work together how control commands e.g. ON OFF are switched through to the , control function control functions you can select according to need. The following related topics are explained: how control commands e.g. ON OFF are switched through from the , control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen
Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:

configurators PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge You need knowledge about: the principle of connecting plugs to sockets electrical drive engineering motor protection. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under: Device parameter > Motor control.
4-1
Motor Control
4.1
4.1.1
Control stations
Description Control stations are places from which control commands are given to the motor. SIMOCODE pro supports four different control stations: Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via pushbutton. PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote). PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software. Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the switchgear cabinet door. Control commands can be e.g: motor on (ON<), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing starter motor slow (ON<), motor fast (ON<<) , motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) for the control commands to , take effect. Control stations contain: 5 inputs (plugs ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON >, ON>>). The number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. A direct starter, for example, has only the inputs ON> and OFF active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Control stations
Control station - local control In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally device inputs) for the control commands to take effect. Attention The OFF command LC OFF is 0-active. Therefore, it is guaranteed that SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. in case of a wire break in the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.
Pushbutton
BU input 1 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 2 3 4
ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Local [LC] To enable
Control station - PLC/DCS This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the automation system (PLC/DCS) via the cyclic control telegram of PROFIBUS DP . The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally PROFIBUS DP bits) for the control commands to take effect.
Cycl. cont. data Bit 0.0 PLC
ON<< ON<
PLC/DCS [DPV1] To enable
DP
Number: 16
OFF ON>
Bit 1.7
ON>>
4-3
Motor Control
Control station - PC This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP The control commands are sent via the acyclic . control telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1. Attention If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP its control commands automati, cally take effect via the PC[DPV1] control station. No additional parameterization is necessary.
Acycl. cont. data Bit 0.0 PC
ON<< ON< OFF
PC [DPV1] To enable
DP
Number: 16 ON> Bit 1.7 ON>>
Control station - operator panel This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons of the 3UF72 operator panel which is e.g. mounted in a switchgear cabinet door. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally buttons of the operator panel) for the control commands to take effect. Attention Since the operator panel only has 4 buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with 2 rotational speeds and 2 directions of rotation. For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control command [OP]<>/ <<>> .
Attention If the SIMOCODE ES PC-Software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands automatically take effect via the control station operator panel (OP). No additional parameterization is necessary.
OP buttons Operator panel
<>/<<>> Op. panel [OP] ON< OFF ON> ON>> To enable
SIMOCODE pro
4-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.1.2
Modes of operation and mode selectors
Modes of operation You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different modes of operation you can switch between: local 1 local 2 local 3 remote/automatic In this mode of operation, the communication must be carried out via PLC. Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g local and PLC/DCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four modes of operation are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every mode of operation, it can be stipulated if ON commands and/or OFF commands are to be used. The modes of operation are controlled in multiplex operation, i.e. only one mode of operation is active at any one time. Example: There are three modes of operation in a system:
Mode of operation Key-operated switch operation, e.g. local 1 Manual operation, e.g. local 3 Remote operation, e.g. remote/automatic
Table 4-1: Modes of operation
Description Only local control entries are admissible! All other control stations are locked. Only operator panel control commands and local control commands can be issued. Only PLC/DCS control commands are permitted; locally, only OFF commands are permitted.
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these modes of operation. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switch operation has priority over all other modes of operation.
4-5
Motor Control
Mode selectors The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the local1 local2 , , local3 and remote/automatic modes of operation. The inputs (S1 and S2 plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) for this. , The following table shows the modes of operation, depending on the signal status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Mode of operation Input Local 1 0 0 Local 2 0 1 Local 3 1 0 Remote/ automatic 1 1
S1 S2
Table 4-2: Modes of operation depending on S1 and S2
Switch authorizations for the individual control stations (local control [LC], PLC/DCS [DP], PC [DPV1], operator panel (OP)) can be set with the different modes of operation for enabling the control stations. The modes of operation are operated via the mode selector in the multiplex. This means that only one mode of operation is always valid, controlled via the signals S1 and S2 (column). Example for a dynamic mode of operation in relationship to time:
S1 S2
0 0
1 1
1 0
1 1 Remote operation
0 0 Keyoperated switch Local 1 Time t
KeyRemote operation Manual operation operated switch Local 1 0 Figure 4-1: Example - modes of operation Remote Local 3
Remote
SIMOCODE pro
4-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Operator enable of the individual control stations The following diagram shows the operator enable of an individual control station:
Single control station Inputs I O Simplified diagram of the single control station 4 ON< OFF ON> ON>> ON OFF ON: ON>>, ON>, ON<, ON<<, I O 4
ON<<
E1...4 I Local control [LC] OFF O E1...4 PLC/DCS [DP] OFF
I O
E1...4 PC [DPV1] OFF
I O
E1...4 Operator panel (OP) OFF
I O
Figure 4-2: Operator enable of a single control station
The following is enabled:

E
: all ON commands : OFF command
4-7
Motor Control
4.1.3 Enables
Enables and enabled control command
Enables for the control commands ON and OFF which must be activa, ted, are assigned to each single control station for every mode of operation. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the dialog Control stations in SIMOCODE ES. Enabled control command The control commands are switched through to the function block Enabled control command The control function, e.g. reversing starter, is usually . controlled with this function blocks sockets. Enables and enabled control command schematic The following diagram shows the control stations and modes of operation:
Mode selector 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote
Local
S1 S2
ON << control [LC] ON < OFF ON> ON >>

PLC/DCS [DP]
Enables ON OFF I O I O I O I O
Enables
ON << ON < OFF ON > ON >>
ON << EnON < abled control OFF command ON >
To the control function
PC [DPV1]
ON >>
Operator panel (OP)
Activation of enables for control commands ON and OFF in SIMOCODE ES

Enables ON OFF
Figure 4-3: Enables and enabled control command
SIMOCODE pro
4-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.1.4
Settings
Control stations LC ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> PLC/DCS [DP] ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> PC [DPV1] ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> Operator panel [OP] <>/<<>> ON< OFF ON> ON>> Mode selector S1 S1
Table 4-3: Control station settings
Description Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually device inputs). The OFF plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually operator panel pushbuttons)
For switching between the 4 modes of operation local 1, local 2, local 3, remote with arbitrary signals (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) ,
4-9
Motor Control
4.2
4.2.1
Control functions
Description Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders. They have the following important features: enabling/evaluation of control stations monitoring switching on/switching off (no current flows without the ON command) monitoring the OFF state (no current flows without the ON command) monitoring the ON status switching off in case of a fault. For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE uses F (feedback) ON, which is usually derived directly from the current flow information. All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications are already implemented in the control functions. Control functions contain: inputs (plug ) for control commands (ON <<,ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with the sockets Enabled control command From there, . control commands come from the different control stations. The number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For example, with a direct starter, only the inputs ON> and OFF are active. auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON outputs (sockets ) for contactor controls QE1 to QE5. The number of contactor controls depends on the control function chosen. The contactor controls are usually connected to the relay outputs that are intended for controlling the contactor coils displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS. The number of displays depends on the control function chosen. statuses, e.g. Status - ON <<, Status - ON >> The number of statu. ses depends on the control function chosen. faults, e.g. Fault - feedback (F) ON Fault - antivalence , settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc. motor protection with the parameters e.g. Overload protection - set current Ie1 overload protection - class etc. These parameters are described in , , chapter3 "Motor Protection". Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active in the background Motor protection and thermistor motor protection . are independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions. Standard function blocks that can be activated as required A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the control function
SIMOCODE pro
4-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Control function schematic The following schematic shows the general representation of a control function:
Plugs of the control commands are usually connected with the Enabled control command sockets
Control commands Contactor controls
ON<< Enabled control command ON< OFF ON> ON>>
ON<< ON< OFF
Contactors/control Control function Motor protection
QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5

Displays (lamp control)
ON> ON>>
Setting
QLE << QLE <
(ON<<) (ON<) (OFF) (ON>) (ON>>) (Fault)

Status signals 1), e.g. for PROFIBUS DP
Aux. control inputs *
QLA QLE > QLE >> QLS
F ON FC FO TC TO
ON<< ON< OFF ON>
* Abbreviations Feedback ON FC FO TC TO Feedback ON Feedback CLOSE Feedback OPEN Torque CLOSE Torque OPEN
ON>>
Figure 4-4: General representation of the control function
1) Status signals:
The feeder status feedback is reported via the status signals or the QL signals. The feedback information (ON or OFF) is linked to the signal Feedback ON (e.g. current). Feeder status feedback: status signals, e.g. Status ON< that can be analyzed e.g. via , PROFIBUS DP display, (lamp control) Display - QLE< that can activate e.g. a signal lamp ,
4-11
Motor Control
Extent and application Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:
SIMOCODE Control function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Overload relay Direct starter Reversing starter Circuit breaker Star-delta starter Star-delta starter, with reversal of the direction of rotation Dahlander Dahlander, with reversal of the direction of rotation Pole-changing switch Pole-changing switch, with reversal of the direction of rotation Valve Slider 1 to slider 5 Soft starter Soft reversing starter
Table 4-4: Control functions
SIMOCODE pro
4-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.2
General settings and definitions
Parameters
Parameter F ON
Description Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current flowing socket) as factory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor to the signal is not necessary. Depending on the control function chosen, this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the status ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >> signals. No current flowing means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display and the Status - OFF signal Deactivated: the control command on the corresponding input of the control stations ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >> is saved. It can only be revoked by an OFF control command from the corresponding control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in lokking mode. Locking is preset. Activated: non-maintained command mode affects the inputs of all control stations ON<, ON <<, ON >, ON >> depending on the control , function chosen. A control command is only effective as long as there is a high signal . Deactivated: commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are only implemented after a previous OFF and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset. Activated: commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous OFF and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time/switching interval, the selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be canceled at any time with OFF. You can choose between motor resistive load
Non-maintained command mode
Save switching command
Load type
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
4-13
Motor Control
Parameter Feedback time
Description SIMOCODE monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via F ON (Feedback ON). If the status of F ON changes - without a corresponding switching command - the fault feedback (F) switches off the feeder. The default value is 0.5 s. The feedback time can be used to suppress such feedback faults for a defined period of time, e.g. in case of network switches. When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE continuously controls if F ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the ON control command being issued, a fault message fault - feedback (F) ON is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified. When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously controls if F ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the OFF command being issued, a fault message fault - feedback (F) OFF is issued. The contactor controls are deactivated. SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/ switching off must be completed within this time period. The default value is 1.0 s. After an ON control command has been issued, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message Fault - execution ON command will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls. After the OFF control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message Fault - execution OFF command will be issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified. For the "Dahlander" and "pole-changing switch" control functions, switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with the time configured. For the "Star/Delta" control function, the switching interval extends the switching interval between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time configured. SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.
Execution time
Switching interval
Interlocking time
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
4-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
QE 1 Switch ON ON Switch OFF
OFF 0 Voltage failure, e.g. pulsating current conditions
OFF
F ON 1
OFF 0 Az Az: Execution time Rz: Feedback time Rz Az Rz
Figure 4-5: Execution time (Az) and feedback time (Rz) depending on F ON
Faults The contactor controls are deactivated. There is also: a flashing signal on the QLS lamp control a flashing signal on the GEN. FAULT LED the Status - general fault signal the corresponding signaling bit of the fault
4-15
Motor Control
4.2.3 Description
Overload relay
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like an electronic overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. The control stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g. ON>, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays. When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault signal of a protection or monitoring system. The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of overload. Overload relay schematic
Contactors/controlling Overload relays Motor protection
Contactor controls QE3
Displays
Aux. control inputs
F ON* *Feedback ON Figure 4-6: Overload relay schematic
Load type QLS (Fault)
Settings You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter "General settings and definitions" on page 4-13.
Overload relay F ON Description Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket). You can select between motor resistive load.
Load type
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
Note: In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when the overload is tripped (=0). This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
SIMOCODE pro
4-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.4
Direct starters
Description SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function. Control commands
Start with ON > activates the QE1 internal contactor control Stop with OFF deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated. Direct starter schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Direct starters
Contactor controls QE1 ON
OFF ON>
Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Displays (lamps) Load type QLA Feedback time QLE > (OFF) (ON)
Aux. control inputs
Execution time QLS Status
F ON* (Fault)
OFF ON> *Feedback ON
Figure 4-7: Direct starter schematic
4-17
Motor Control
Direct starter OFF Description OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , preferably with the Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket , preferably with the Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket). Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can select between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON>
F ON
Non-maintained command mode Load type
Feedback time Execution time
Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.5
Reversing starters
Description With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards). Control commands
Start with ON > activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise i.e. forwards) Start with ON < activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e. backwards) Stop with OFF deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching the direction of rotation Switching the direction of rotation is possible via the OFF control command directly, when the Save switching command is activated if the signal Status - ON > or Status - ON < is no longer issued (motor is switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired. SIMOCODE pro prevents both the contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.
4-19
Motor Control
Reversing starter schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Reversing starter
Contactor activations QE1 QE2 Right Left
ON< OFF ON>
Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type Feedback time
Displays QLE < (ON<) QLA QLE > (OFF) (ON>)
Aux. control inputs
Execution time Interlocking time QLS Status ON< OFF ON>
F ON*
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Interlocking time active
Figure 4-8: Reversing starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Reversing starter ON< Description ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON< socket) OFF control command (connection with optional socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command, clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can select between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 255 seconds
OFF
ON>
F ON
Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type
Feedback time Execution time Interlocking time
Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings
4-21
Motor Control
4.2.6
Circuit breaker
Description With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch a circuit breaker (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF. Thus, the circuit breakers are connected to PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. Control commands
Start with ON> activates the QE1 contactor control for an impulse of 400 ms. Stop with OFF activates the QE2 contactor control for an impulse of 400 ms. With reset the QE2 contactor control is activated for an impulse of 400 ms , when the circuit breaker is released (alarm switch = ON).
The impulse of a control command is always fully executed before the counter impulse is set. The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Making internal assignments You have to make the following assignments: 1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the ON connection of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the OFF connection of the motor drive of the circuit breaker. 3. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the auxiliary switch (HS) of the circuit breaker, to the auxiliary control input Feedback ON . 4. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the alarm switch of the circuit breaker, to the input of the External fault 1 standard function block.
SIMOCODE pro
4-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Circuit breaker schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Circuit breaker Motor protection
Contactor controls QE1 QE2

400 ms. 400 ms.
ON OFF
OFF ON>
Non-maintained command mode Displays Load type QLA Feedback time QLE > (OFF) (ON)
Aux. control inputs F ON* Auxiliary switch
Execution time QLS Status
(Fault)
OFF ON> *Feedback ON Figure 4-9: Circuit breaker schematic
4-23
Motor Control
Circuit breaker OFF Description OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection always with sokket , (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker is connected to.) Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Higher than the motor running time of the motor drive of the circuit breaker. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON>
F ON
Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.7 Description
Star-delta starters
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro starts the motor first with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta. Control commands
Start with ON first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor) Stop with OFF deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching from star to delta For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor) is connected. SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta: current-dependent with decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie). time-dependent according to the set time parameter Maximum time for star operation when the current in the star operation does not sink below this level. Notes It is recommended wiring the QE* contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit. Attention If you use the internal earth-fault detection with a star-delta connection, false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention If the current measurement module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function. Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/3 Ie = 100 A x 1/3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
4-25
Motor Control
Switching interval The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching interval. Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the interval is longer. Star-delta starter schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Star-delta starter
Contactor controls QE1 QE2 QE3 Displays Star contactor Delta contactor Network contactor
OFF ON>
Motor protection Non-maintained command mode
Load type QLA Feedback time

Aux. control inputs
(OFF) (ON)
QLE >
Execution time QLS Status -
F ON* Switching interval Maximum time for star operation Transformer mounted (Fault)
OFF ON>
*Feedback ON
Switching time active
Figure 4-10: Star-delta starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Star-delta starter OFF Description OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket, usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 655.3 seconds(10 ms steps)
ON>
F ON
Feedback time Execution time Switching interval
Maximum time for Time-dependent switching from star to delta star operation range 0 to 255 seconds Transformer moun- The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching ted depend on the mounting place of the current measurement module. Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/3 In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings
4-27
Motor Control
4.2.8
Star-delta starters with reversal of the direction of rotation
Description With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rotation in star-delta operation. Control commands
Clockwise rotation: start with ON> first activates the QE1 (star contactor) contactor control and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor, clockwise rotation) Counter-clockwise rotation: start with ON< first activates the QE1 (star contactor) contactor activation and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control QE4 (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation) Stop with OFF deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching from star to delta For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor). SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta: current-dependent, for decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie). time-dependent to the set time parameter Maximum time for star operation when the current in the star operation does not sink below this level. Switching the direction of rotation It is possible to change the direction of rotation via the OFF control command directly, when the Save switching command is activated if the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor is switched off) AND after the interlocking time has expired. SIMOCODE pro prevents both the contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time . Start-up is always in star mode.
SIMOCODE pro
4-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Notes It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. Attention If you use the internal earth-fault detection for a star-delta connection, false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention If the current measurement module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function. Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/3 Ie = 100 A x 1/3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
Switching interval The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching interval. Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current, if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the interval is longer.
4-29
Motor Control
Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type Feedback time
Contactor controls QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 Displays QLE< QLA QLE> QLS Status ON< OFF ON> Star contactor Delta contactor Right - network contactor Left - network contactor (ON<) (OFF) (ON>) (Fault)
ON< OFF ON>
Aux. control inputs
Execution time Interlocking time Switching interval Maximum time for star operation Transformer mounted
F ON*
*Feedback ON
Switching interval active Interlocking time active
Figure 4-11: Star-delta starter schematic, with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Star-delta starter OFF Description OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) ON< control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON< socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 255 seconds
ON>
ON<
F ON
Feedback time Execution time Switching interval Interlocking time
Maximum time for Time-dependent switching from star to delta. star operation Range 0 to 255 seconds Transformer moun- The set current and the switching levels for the star-delta switching ted depend on the mounting position of the current transformer/ current measurement module. Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/3 In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-11: Star-delta starter settings, with reversal of the direction of rotation
4-31
Motor Control
4.2.9
Dahlander
Description With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed. Control commands
Slow: start with ON> first activates the QE2 contactor control (slow) Fast: start with ON>> first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (network contactor, fast) Stop with OFF deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching the speed It is possible to switch the speed via the OFF control command directly, when the Save switching command is activated when the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from fast = > slow after the switching interval has expired.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the fast speed from being switched on at the same time as the contactor for the slow speed. Switching interval The switching interval parameter can be used to delay switching from fast to slow to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
4-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Note Attention Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit: Ie1 for the slower speed Ie1 for the faster speed Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise, you will need according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers.
Dahlander schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Dahlander
Contactor controls QE1 Fast Slow Fast - star contactor
OFF ON> ON>>
Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type Feedback time
QE2 QE3
Displays
QLA QLE> QLE>
(OFF) (ON>) (ON>>) (Fault)
Aux. control inputs
Execution time
F ON* Switching interval
QLS Status OFF ON>
*Feedback ON
ON>> Switching interval active
Figure 4-12: Dahlander control function schematic
4-33
Motor Control
Dahlander OFF Description OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command (slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) ON>> control command (fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON>> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON>
ON>>
F ON
Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.10
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
Description This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds. Control commands
Right - slow: start with ON> first activates QE2 the contactor control (rightslow). Right - fast: start with ON>> first activates the QE3 contactor control (faststar contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (right-fast) Left - slow: start with ON< activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow) Left - fast: start with ON<< activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (leftfast) Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching the direction of rotation It is possible to switch the direction of rotation via the OFF control command directly, when the parameter Save switching command is activated if the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time has expired. SIMOCODE prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time . Switching the speed It is possible to switch the speed via the OFF control command directly when the Save switching command is activated when the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from fast = > slow after the switching interval has expired.
4-35
Motor Control
Switching interval The switching interval parameter is used to delay switching from fast to slow to give the motor enough time to run down. Notes You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs. Schematic Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
Control commands ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Contactors/controlling Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type Feedback time
Contactor controls QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 Displays QLE<< QLE< QLA QLE> QLE> QLS Status ON<< ON< OFF ON> Right - fast Right - slow Fast - star contactor Left - slow Left - fast
Aux. control inputs
Execution time Interlocking time Switching interval
F ON*
*Feedback ON
ON>> Switching interval active Interlocking time active
Figure 4-13: Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation ON<< Description
ON<< control command (left, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON<< socket) ON< control command (left, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON< socket) OFF control command (connection with optional socket , optionally with socket Enabled control command - OFF) ON> control command (left, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) ON>> control command (right, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON>> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range: 0 to 255 seconds Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
F ON
Feedback time Execution time Interlocking time Switching interval
Table 4-13: Dahlander control function settings with reversal of the direction of rotation
4-37
Motor Control
4.2.11 Description
Pole-changing switches
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator windings in two speed levels (fast and slow). Control commands
Slow: start with ON> activates the QE2 contactor control (slow). Fast: start with ON>> activates the QE1 contactor control (fast). Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching the speed It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" -> "slow" after the switching interval has expired: via the OFF control command directly, when the Save switching command is activated. Switching interval The switching interval parameter can be used to delay switching from fast to slow to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
4-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Note Attention Two set currents have to be set for the pole-changing switch: Ie1 for the slower speed Ie1 for the faster speed Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise, you will need according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers.
Pole-changing switches schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Pole-changing switches
Contactor controls QE1 QE2 Fast Slow
OFF ON> ON>>
Motor protection Non-maintained command code Save switching command Load type QLA Feedback time Displays
(OFF) (ON>) (ON>>) (Fault)
Aux. control inputs F ON*
Execution time Switching interval
QLE> QLE>> QLS Status OFF ON>
*Feedback ON
ON>> Switching interval active
Figure 4-14: Pole-changing switch control function
4-39
Motor Control
Pole-changing switches OFF Description
OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command (slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) ON>> control command (fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON>> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON>
ON>>
F ON
Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.12
Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
Description This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds. Control commands
Right - slow: start with ON> activates the QE2 contactor control (right-slow) Right - fast: start with ON>> activates the QE1 contactor activation (rightfast) Left - slow: start with ON< activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow) Left - fast: start with ON<< activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast) Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated. Switching the direction of rotation It is possible to switch the direction of rotation via the OFF control command directly, when the parameter Save switching command is activated if the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired. SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time . Switching the speed It is possible to switch via the OFF control command directly when the Save switching command is activated when the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from fast to slow after the switching interval has expired.
Switching interval SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the speeds fast and slow from switching on at the same time. The switching interval parameter is used to delay switching from fast to slow to give the motor enough time to run down.
4-41
Motor Control
Notes At least one additional digital module is necessary for this control function. Attention Two set currents are to be set with the pole-changing switch: Ie1 for the slower speed Ie1 for the faster speed Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/ Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers Schamatic: Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
Control commands ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Contactors/controlling
Contactor controls Right - fast Right - slow
Pole-changing switch with QE1 reversal of the direction of rotation QE2 Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type Feedback time Execution time Displays QLE<< QLE< QLA QLE> QLE>> QLS Status ON<< ON< OFF ON> QE4 QE5
Left - slow Left - fast
F ON*
Interlocking time Switching interval
*Feedback ON
ON>> Switching interval active Interlocking time active
Figure 4-15: Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation ON<< Description
ON<< control command (left, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON<< socket) ON< control command (left, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON< socket) OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command (right, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) ON>> control command (right, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON>> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range 0 to 25.5 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 255 seconds Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Feedback ON
Feedback time Execution time Interlocking time Switching interval
Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing switches with reversal of the direction of rotation
4-43
Motor Control
4.2.13 Description
Valve
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve. With the control commands OPEN and CLOSE the valve is brought into , the corresponding end position. SIMOCODE must be informed via corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE) when the end position has been reached. Control commands
Open: start with ON> activates the QE1 internal contactor control. Close: stop with OFF deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the valve into the close position. Notes Attention The motor protection functions are not active. A current measurement module is not necessary.
Attention If both end position switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message Fault - double 1 (=close) If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the valve is switched off with the fault message Fault - end position fault (=close)
SIMOCODE pro
4-44
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Valve schematic
Control commands
Contactors/controlling Valve
Contactor controls QE1 OPEN
OFF ON>
Non-maintained command mode Displays
QLA QLE> Aux. control inputs * FC FO Status Execution time QLS
(CLOSE) (OPEN)
(Fault)
* Abbreviations FC FO Feedback CLOSE Feedback OPEN

OFF ON> FC FO
Figure 4-16: Control function valve schematic
Direct starters OFF Description OFF control command (close) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON control command (open) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Time until the end position is reached. Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON>
Non-maintained command mode Execution time
Table 4-16: Valve control function settings
4-45
Motor Control
4.2.14
Slider
Description SIMOCODE can control sliders/actuators with this control function. The slider is moved into the corresponding end position with the OPEN and CLOSE control commands and is deactivated via its end position switches (1-active) or torque switch (0-active). SIMOCODE pro must be informed about the response of the end position switches/ torque switches via its inputs. Control commands
Open: start with ON > activates the QE1 contactor control until End position OPEN (feedback open) is reached. Close: start with ON < activates the QE2 contactor control until End position CLOSE (feedback close) is reached. Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls. The drive remains stopped in that position.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Function schematic
Torque switch OPEN
Torque switch
TC Motor shaft with springs at the beginning and end FO
OPEN
CLOSE
End position switch Slider
FC
Gear
OPEN
CLOSE
Figure 4-17: Function schematic of the torque switch and the end position switch when controlling sliders
SIMOCODE pro
4-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Switching the direction of travel It is possible to switch the direction of travel via the OFF control command if the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time has expired. SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time . Notes Attention The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated end position switch when the torque switch (TO)/(TC) is connected. In this case, the slider is switched off immediately with the fault message Fault - blocked slider . If both end position switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the slider is immediately switched off via the fault message Fault - double 1 (=close) If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the slider is switched off immediately with the fault message Fault - double 0 . If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the slider is switched off with the fault message Fault - end position fault .
4-47
Motor Control
Slider schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling Slider Motor protection Non-maintained command mode
Contactor controls QE1 OPEN CLOSE
ON< OFF ON>
QE2
Load type Feedback time

Aux. control inputs *
Displays QLE< CLOSE QLA QLE> Stop OPEN
Execution time QLS Status ON< OFF ON> Closes Opens FC FO TC TO
* Abbreviations Feedback ON FC FO TC TO Feedback ON Feedback CLOSE Feedback OPEN Torque CLOSE Torque OPEN
Feedback ON Interlocking time FC FO TC TO
(Fault)
CLOSE Stop OPEN
Figure 4-18: Slider schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-48
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Variants for slide control The following table shows the 5 variants for slide control:
Variant Switch off CLOSE OPEN
TC
Torque CLOSE
FC
End position CLOSE
FO
End position OPEN
TO
Torque OPEN
Slider 1 After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSE). Slider 2 After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSE) AND response of the associated torque switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSE) Slider 3 After reaching the end position FO (open). After reaching the end position 'CLOSE', the respective torque switch TC must respond after the end position switch FC has responded. Slider 4 After reaching the end position FC (CLOSE). After reaching the end position FO (OPEN), the respective torque switch TO must also respond after the end position switch FO has responded. Slider 5 After reaching the end position or the torque. The actuator is either monitored by the end position switches or by the torque switches. The switches are implemented as changeover contacts and are checked for antivalence. In the case of non-antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and TC=0), SIMOCODE recognizes a wire break and deactivates the slider with the fault message Fault - antivalence
Table 4-17: Variants for slide control
Antivalent active
Antivalent active
Notes
Attention The signals of the torque switches and the position switches must be wired to the inputs of the basic units. Torque switches must be O-active, whereas the position switches must be 1-active.
4-49
Motor Control
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation ON< Description
ON< control command (close) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON< socket) Control command stop (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command (open) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback CLOSE (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the end position switch is wired to) Auxiliary control input Feedback OPEN (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit switch is wired to) Auxiliary control input Torque CLOSE (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque switch is wired to) Auxiliary control input Torque CLOSE (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque switch is wired to) Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds Time until the limit position is reached. range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range: 0 to 255 seconds
OFF
ON>
F ON
FC
FO
TC
TO
Table 4-18: Control function slider settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-50
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.15
Soft starters
Description With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. Control commands
Start with ON > activates the QE1 and QE4 internal contactor controls. Stop with OFF first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal Feedback ON is no longer issued, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter. With reset the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and then sends , the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated. Making internal assignments You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor 2. Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the ON input from the soft starter is to be activated 3. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter 4. Assign the ON> and OFF control commands to the enabled control commands 5. Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output fault of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module external fault 1 . 6. The signal End of start-up of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the outputs and processed by SIMOCODE.
Note Attention In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the Execution time parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running down time of the soft starter.
4-51
Motor Control
Soft starter schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling Soft starter
Contactor controls QE1 Network contactor
OFF ON>
Motor protection Non-maintained command mode QE3 QE4 Load type Feedback time Displays QLA QLE> (OFF) (ON>) ON
20 ms.
Aux. control inputs F ON*
Execution time QLS Status OFF ON>
(Fault)
*Feedback ON Figure 4-19: Soft starter schematic
Circuit breakers OFF Description OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range 0 to 25.5 seconds At least > smooth running down time. range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
ON>
Feedback ON
Table 4-19: Soft starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-52
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.16 Description
Soft reversing starter
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the motor direction of rotation (forwards and backwards). Control commands
Start with ON > activates QE1 and QE4 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards) Start with ON < activates QE2 and QE4 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e. backwards) Stop with OFF first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the Feedback ON signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE4 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter. With reset the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the , soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of control stations). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the Enabled control command sockets. Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated. Switching the direction of rotation It is possible to switching the direction of rotation via the OFF control command directly, when the Save switching command parameter is activated if the Status - ON> or Status - ON< signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired. SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.
4-53
Motor Control
Making internal assignments You have to make the following assignments:

1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor (right) 2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor (left) 3. Assign the QE4 contactor control to an optional relay output with which the ON input from the soft starter must be activated 4. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter 5. Assign the ON> ON< and OFF control commands to the enabled con, trol commands 6. Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro which is connected to the signaling output Fault of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module External fault 1 . 7. The Start-up end signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function. Soft reversing starter schematic
Control commands
Protecting/controlling Soft reversing starter Motor protection Non-maintained command mode Save switching command Load type Feedback time
Contactor controls QE1 Right Left

20 ms.
ON< OFF ON>
QE2 QE3 QE4
ON Displays QLE< (ON<) QLA QLE> QLS Status ON< OFF ON> (OFF) (ON>) (Fault)
Feedbacks F ON*
Execution time Interlocking time
*Feedback ON
Figure 4-20: Soft reversing starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-54
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Reversing starter ON< Description ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON< socket) OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - OFF socket) ON> control command, clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Enabled control command - ON> socket) Auxiliary control input Feedback ON (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with Status - current is flowing socket) Deactivated (presetting) Activated Deactivated (presetting) Activated You can choose between motor resistive load Range 0 to 25.5 seconds At least > smooth running down time. Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds Range 0 to 255 seconds
OFF
ON>
Feedback ON
Table 4-20: Soft reversing starter settings
4-55
4.3
4-56
Lamp control Control station Status signal ON<< Left Left OFF Right Star Delta Right Left contactor contactor network network contactor contactor Fast Slow Fast star contactor Fast star contactor Left slow Left slow Closed Reset ON command ON network contactor Right Left network- networkcontactor contactor Reset ON command Left fast Left fast Left fast Left fast OFF OFF ON Delta Network Star contactor contactor contactor OFF ON Right OFF ON ON OFF impulse impulse OFF ON Left OFF Right Right Left Left OFF Right OFF ON ON OFF ON Active ON< OFF ON> ON>> QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> Contactor control QLE<< (ON<<) QLE< (ON<) QLA (OFF) QLE> (ON>) QLE>> (ON>>) OFF Slow Fast OFF Slow Fast Left fast Left fast OFF ON Closed Stop Open Open Closed Stop Open Open Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Open Open Left slow OFF Right slow Right fast Right fast Right slow OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow Left slow OFF Right slow Right fast Right fast Right slow Left slow Left slow Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed OFF Right slow OFF OFF Slow Right slow Closed Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop OFF Open Open Open Open Open Open ON Right fast Fast Right fast Left OFF Right Left OFF Right -
Motor Control
Specification/ Control function
Overload 1),2)
Direct starter 1),2)
Reversing starter 1),2)
Circuit breaker 1),2)
Star-delta starter 2)
Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation 2)
Dahlander 2)
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation 2)
Pole changing switch 2)
Pole changing switch with reversing the direction of rotation 2)
Valve 2)
Slider 1 2)
Slider 2 2)
Slider 3 2)
Slider 4 2)
Slider 5 2)
Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal of the control functions
Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal of the control functions
Soft starter 2)
Soft reversing starter2)
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
SIMOCODE pro
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
Monitoring Functions
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
earth fault monitoring current limit monitoring operation monitoring.
Like motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work in the background All parameters of the monitoring functions are explained. . They can be active or not active, depending on the control function selected. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: configurators programmers commissioners service personnel. Necessary knowledge You need knowledge about: SIMOCODE pro motor protection, motor control the principle of connecting plugs to sockets knowledge of electrical drive engineering. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
5-1
5.1
5.1.1
Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage measurement module

Description SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the 3 current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current/earth fault. The internal earth fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with a low impedance. On recognizing an earth fault, a definable and delayable response can be parameterized.
5.1.2 Response
Internal earth fault
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an internal earth fault: For this, see also Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes".
Current from current measurement
Monitoring - Internal earth fault
Switching off
QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Response to an internal earth fault See table 5-1 Delay of the internal earth fault Signal - Internal earth fault
Figure 5-1: Internal earth fault monitoring
Response Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Delay
Internal earth fault X (d) X X X 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-1: Internal earth-fault monitoring response
SIMOCODE pro
5-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.2
5.2.1
Current limit monitoring

Description The current limit monitoring function is used - independently of the overload protection - for process monitoring. Exceeding a current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty filter on a pump or a motor mounting which is running increasingly sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn-out. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. Here, the response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Current limit values

Trip level: I> Response when I> Delay when I> Current from current measurement Warning level: I> Response when I> Delay when I> Trip level: I< Response when I< Delay when I< Warning level: I< Response when I< Delay when I< Hysteresis levels H See table 5-5 Signal - Warning level I< See table 5-4 Signal - Trip level I< See table 5-3 Signal - Warning level I> See table 5-2 Signal - Trip level I>
Figure 5-2: Current limit monitoring
5-3
Diagram The following diagram shows the warning level and trip level functions for the upper and lower current limits:
Current Trip level I> H Warning level I> H H Warning level I< Lower current limit
Upper current limit
H Trip level I< 0 H Hysteresis
Figure 5-3: Warning levels and trip levels for the upper and lower current limits
SIMOCODE pro
5-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.2.2
I> (upper limit)
Trip level, warning level With current limit monitoring I> (upper limit), 2 different synchronization levels, I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit) warning level, can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of one or more phases exceeds the synchronization level, the current limit monitoring is activated. Range:
Trip level: Warning level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Trip level response Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro if the trip level is exceeded: For this, see also Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes".
Response Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Delay Trip level X (d) X X 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-2: Trip level response for current limit monitoring I>
Warning level response Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro if the warning level is exceeded: For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes".
Response Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Delay Warning level: X (d) X X 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-3: Warning level response for current limit monitoring I>
5-5
5.2.3
I< (lower limit)
Trip level, warning level With current limit monitoring I< (lower limit), 2 different synchronization levels (trip level / warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of one or more phases falls below the synchronization level, the current limit monitoring is activated. Range:
Trip level: Warning level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Trip level response Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro on falling below the trip level: For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes".
Response Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Delay Trip level X (d) X X 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-4: Trip level response for current limit monitoring I<
Warning level response Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro on falling below the warning level: For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes".
Response Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off Delay Warning level: X X X 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-5: Trip level response for current limit monitoring I<
SIMOCODE pro
5-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.3
5.3.1
Operation monitoring
Description SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear-out) or they were stopped too long a period of time. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing in SIMOCODE pro. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre -warnings.
Switching off QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Operation monitoring
Operating hours Operating hours level. Response Stop time Stopped time level Control functions Response Number of starts Permissible starts See table 5-6 See table 5-6
Motor operating hours Signal - Motor operating hours >
Motor stop times Signal - Stop time >
Number of motor starts Start time frame Overshoot response Pre-warning response Interlocking time See table 5-6 See table 5-6 Signal - Number of motor starts> - Another start permitted - No start permitted
Figure 5-4: Operation monitoring
Response
Response Monitoring operating hours - level X (d) X X Stop time monitoring level X (d) X X Overshooting Number of starts prewarning X (d) X X -
Deactivated Signal Warn Switch off
X (d) X X X
Table 5-6: Operation monitoring response
5-7
5.3.2
Operating hours monitoring The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of generating maintenance prompts for the motor in good time.
Level If the operating hours exceed the set synchronization level, the monitoring function is activated. Range:
Level 0 to 1193046 hours
Response Here you can set the overshooting response. For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6. 5.3.3 Stop time monitoring In system parts for important processes, dual drives are often in operation (A and B drives). It must be assured here that these drives are always alternately run to avoid long stop times and reduce the risk of non-availability. The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to issue a warning which causes the other motor not presently in operation to be connected. Level The length of the stop time is set here. The monitoring function is activated when this stop time interval is exceeded. Range:
Level 0 to 65535 hours
Response Here you can determine the response when the permissible stop time is exceeded: For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6.
SIMOCODE pro
5-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.3.4
Monitoring the number of starts The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system parts (motor, switching devices like e.g. soft starters and converters) against too many impermissible start processes inside a parameterizable time frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful for start-up or manual control. The following schematic shows the principle of the function for monitoring the number of starts.
1. Start within the time frame Time frame Example: 3 starts allowed t
Pre-warning Figure 5-5: Monitoring the number of starts
Overshooting
Permissible starts The maximum number of starts is set here. With the first start, the time interval Start time frame starts to run. After the second to the last permissible start has been executed, a pre -warning Another start permitted is issued. Range:
Permissible starts 1 to 255
Start time frame The time frame of the start process is set here. The maximum number of starts is only available again after the parameterizable start time frame is finished. The available starts are shown by the analog value Permissible starts actual value . Range:
Start time frame 0 to 65535 seconds
Overshooting response Here you can set the response to be carried out when the permissible number of starts within the start time frame have been exceeded: For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6.
5-9
Pre-warning response Here you can set the response to be carried out after the second to the last start: For this, see also Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6. Interlocking time If a new start command is issued within the time frame after the last permissible start has been carried out, this new start command will no longer be executed by the setting Overshoot response - switching off The Fault . - number of starts > and the set interlocking time is activated. Range:
Interlocking time 0 to 65535 seconds
SIMOCODE pro
5-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
In this chapter In this chapter you will find information on the outputs of SIMOCODE pro: relay outputs light-emitting diodes of the operator panel signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP . Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
planners and configurators programmers.
Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge:

the principle of connecting plugs to sockets PROFIBUS DP .
6-1
Outputs
6.1
Introduction
Description SIMOCODE pro has different outputs. The outputs include, for example: output terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital modules LEDs on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state outputs to the PROFIBUS DP . Schematic The following schematic shows the general representation of the types of outputs:
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
LEDs operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
DP
PROFIBUS DP
Figure 6-1: General display of the types of outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Extent and application Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying the status or signaling via PROFIBUS DP The system provides different outputs, . depending on the device series:
SIMOCODE Outputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Number Basic unit BU, outputs 1 to 3 Operator panel LEDs Digital module 1 DM1 - output 1 to 2 Digital module 2 DM2 - output 1 to 2 Acyclic signaling data Cyclic signaling data
Table 6-1: Outputs
Number
6-3
Outputs
6.2
Basic unit (BU)

The basic unit has a BU - output function block with 3 relay outputs. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps using relay outputs. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The BU - output function block consists of 3 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3 3 relays output terminals In total there is: 1 BU - output function block for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic The following schematic shows the relay outputs:

SIMOCODE pro
BU - output
1 2 3
1 Out1 2 Out2 3 6 Out3 7
Terminal numbers
Output terminals
Figure 6-2: BU output schematic
Application examples
Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder: You can e.g. define which relay output is used for controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding QE. contactor control.
Controlling lamps for displaying operating states: You can e.g. define which relay outputs are used for controlling lamps/ LEDs which then display the operating states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF fast, slow...). , For this, connect the desired relay output to the corresponding QL.. contactor control. These are specially designed for controlling lamps and LEDs: The QL... lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays via a 2 Hz flashing frequency: test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing) unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing) passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s
SIMOCODE pro
6-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Settings
BU output
Description
Outputs 1 to 3
Controls the BU-output function block from an arbitrary signal (optional sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc. (usually , from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-2: BU output settings
6-5
Outputs
6.3
Operator panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro has an OP - LED function block with 7 LEDs. The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used for arbitrary status displays. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. with the sockets for the status signals). The OP - LED function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and parameterized in the device configuration! The OP - LED function block contains 4 inputs, OP LED green 1 to OP LED green 4 corresponding to the green , LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/logically assigned to the buttons of the operator panel. They usually display the feedback of the motor operating state 3 inputs, OP - LED yellow 1 to OP - LED yellow 3 corresponding to the , yellow LEDs 4 green LEDs 3 yellow LEDs In total there is: 1 OP - LED function block for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
LEDs in the operator panel
OP - LED Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4 Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3
QL
Figure 6-3: OP LED schematic
Displaying operating states: You can e.g. define which LEDs are to be activated for displaying the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired LED to the corresponding QL contactor con trol. Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow LEDs.
SIMOCODE pro
6-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Settings
OP LED
Description
Green 1 - green 4
Controls the OP - LED function block from an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. feedback operating state motor)
Yellow 1 - yellow 3 Controls the OP - LED function block from an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. displays for status, signals, faults)
Table 6-3: OP LED settings
6-7
Outputs
6.4
Digital modules (DM)

Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) provides the option of extending the number of inputs and outputs as well as their types by degrees via expansion modules (digital modules). The basic unit has 2 function blocks: Digital module 1 - output and Digital module 2 - output with 2 relay outputs each. You can e.g. switch contactors , or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets. Function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and parameterized in the device configuration! Each function block contains 2 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1, Out2 2 relays output terminals In total there is 1 function block Digital module1 - output BU2 1 function block Digital module2 - output BU2. The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Inputs Supply 24 V DC, external Outputs 2 monostable relay outputs
Description
4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs
110... 240V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay outputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
110... 240V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Table 6-4: Digital modules variations
With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after switching off the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off the supply voltage. Schematic The following schematic shows the relay outputs:
DM1 - output DM2 - output Out1 Out2
1 2
1 2
Out1 Out2
Output terminals
Figure 6-4: DM1 / DM2 output schematic
Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
6-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder: You can e.g. define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding QE contactor control. Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states: You can e.g. define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/LEDs which then display the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding QL... lamp control. Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs.
Settings
DM1 / DM2 output
Description
Output 1 to 2
Controls the DM1 output and DM2 output function blocks from an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc. (usually , from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-5: DM1 / DM2 output settings
6-9
Outputs
6.5
Cyclic signaling
The Cyclic signaling function block is used to determine which information is given cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP For this, . the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The Cyclic signaling function block consists of 16 inputs (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information) 1 input (2 bytes, byte 2 and 3 for analog information, one freely parameterizable word) 1 output (PROFIBUS DP). In total there is 1 Cyclic signaling function block for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Byte 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Byte 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Byte 2/3
Input (analog)
Cyclic signaling
DP
to PROFIBUS DP
Figure 6-5: Cyclic signaling data schematic
SIMOCODE pro
6-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Cyclic services Cyclic signaling data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic control data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signaling data to the DP master. Settings
Acyclic signaling data Byte 0 to 1 Bit 0 to bit 7
Description
Controls the bits with arbitrary signals (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, signaling data, etc.) Controls the word with arbitrary analog signals (arbitrary sockets e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of timers, etc.)
Byte 2/3
Table 6-6: Test settings
Byte 0 of the signaling data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current!
6-11
Outputs
6.6
Acyclic signaling
In addition to Cyclic signaling it is also possible to transmit additional 16, bit information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services. The Acyclic signaling function block is used to determine which information is given acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP For this, . the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The Acyclic signal function block consists of 16 inputs (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information) 1 logic component 1 output (PROFIBUS DP). In total there is 1 function block Acyclic signaling for the BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Byte 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Byte 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
DP
Acyclic signaling
to PROFIBUS DP
Figure 6-6: Acyclic signaling data schematic
SIMOCODE pro
6-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Acyclic services Acyclic signaling data is only transmitted on request. The information (2 bytes) is in data record 203. This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Settings
Acyclic signaling data
Description
Byte 0 to 1 Bit 0 to bit 7

Table 6-7: Test settings
Controls the bits with arbitrary signals (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, signaling data, state information, fault signals, etc.)
6-13
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The inputs include: the four inputs of the basic units (BU1, BU2) the four inputs of digital modules 1 and 2 (DM1, DM2). Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: planners and configurators planners. Necessary knowledge You need knowledge about: the principle of connecting plugs to sockets. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under: Device parameters > Inputs.
7-1
Inputs
7.1
Introduction
SIMOCODE pro has different inputs (input terminals). These inputs provide external information. They are interfaces from the outside to SIMOCODE pro. These inputs become sockets inside SIMOCODE pro. The inputs contain: input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital modules buttons on the operator panel (1 button test/reset, 4 freely parameterizable buttons) and basic units (1 button test/reset) inputs from PROFIBUS DP .
Description
Schematic The following schematic shows the general representation of the input types:
SIMOCODE pro
Input terminals
Input
Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons - Control commands - Test/reset
Input
Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
PROFIBUS DP
DP
Input
Sockets
Figure 7-1: General representation of the input types
SIMOCODE pro
7-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
Scope and application Inputs are used, for example, for inputting external signals e.g. via pushbuttons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed further internally via corresponding connections. Depending on the device series, the system provides different inputs:
SIMOCODE Inputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Number Basic unit BU - inputs 1 to 4 Operator panel buttons Digital module 1 DM1 - inputs 1 to 4 Digital module 2 DM2 - inputs 1 to 4 Acyclic control data Cyclic control data
Table 7-1: Inputs
Number
7-3
Inputs
7.2
Basic unit (BU)

The basic unit has a function block BU - input with 4 grouped digital inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. In order for these signals to be further processed, the plugs of other function blocks, e.g. a control station, must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The function block BU - input consists of input terminals , located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to the sockets BU - input 1 to BU - input 4 24 V DC internally for supplying the inputs of the basic unit outputs in the form of sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the control stations. In total there is: 1 function block BU - input for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic The following schematic shows the inputs of the basic unit
24 V DC internally 8
IN1
Basic unit (BU)

BU - Inputs 1 2 3 4
5
IN2
4
IN3
10
IN4
Terminal numbers
Figure 7-2: Schematic BU - Input
Application example The inputs can be used, for example, to connect the start and stop buttons of the local control station - which can then be assigned to the local control internal control station. Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as Reset or External fault .
SIMOCODE pro
7-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
Supplying the inputs You have three possibilities for supplying the inputs: a): 24 V DC internal. b): 24 V DC external. However, input 3 is reference potential, i.e. 3 inputs are available. c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for the basic unit with a supply voltage of 24 V DC!
a)
24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable Basic unit (BU)
BU - input
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 1 2 3 4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
b)
24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable Basic unit (BU)
BU - input
1 2 3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
c)
24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable Basic unit (BU)
BU - input
1 2 3 4
(not usable)
4
24 V DC
A1 A2
Only possible for the basic unit with a supply voltage of 24 V DC!
Figure 7-3: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs
Settings
Basic unit Debounce time Inputs
Description If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the inputs. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 ms).
Table 7-2: BU - input settings
All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal states on the neighboring inputs do not influence each other.
7-5
Inputs
7.3
Digital modules (DM)

The digital module has a function block BU - input with 4 grouped digital inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. In order for these signals to be further processed, the plugs of other function blocks, e.g. a control station, must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The function block DM - input consists of input terminals , located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the sockets DM - input 1 to DM - input 4 outputs in the form of sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the control stations. In total there is: 1 function block DM1 - Input and DM2 - Input for BU2.
Description
Schematic The following schematic shows the inputs of the digital module
Digital module (DM)
N/M
DM - inputs 1 2 3 4
25
IN1
23
IN2
24
IN3
26
IN4
Terminal numbers
Figure 7-4: Schematic of DM inputs
27
Application example Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the number of binary inputs and outputs on basic device 2. Up to 2 digital modules can be connected. Thus, 4 further binary inputs and 2 further binary outputs are available in each case. Supplying the inputs (only externally, not via BU1/2) 24 V DC or 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 binary outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
7-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
Supplying the inputs There are two versions of the digital module: a): Digital module with 24 V DC input supply b): Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply.
a) 24 V DC external Digital module (DM)
N/M IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
b) 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external Digital module (DM)

N/M
DM - inputs 1 2 3 4
DM - inputs 1 2 3 4
Figure 7-5: Supplying the inputs for the digital module
Settings
Basic unit
Description
Debounce time Inputs
If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the inputs. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. Default setting: 16 ms. These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the values are about 40 ms higher.
Table 7-3: BU - input settings
~
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
7-7
Inputs
7.4
Cyclic controlling
With the Cyclic controlling function block, you can transfer information cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP For this, the inputs . (plugs) must be assigned to the corresponding outputs (sockets). The function block Cyclic controlling consists of 16 outputs (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information) 1 input PROFIBUS DP . In total there is: 1 function block Cyclic controlling for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Cyclic controlling
Byte 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Byte 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
DP
from PROFIBUS DP
Figure 7-6: Schematic cyclic control data
Cyclic services The cyclic data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between DP master and DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic control data (cyclic controlling) to SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signal data (cyclic send) to the DP master.
SIMOCODE pro
7-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
7.5
Acyclic controlling
In addition to Cyclic controlling there is also the option of transferring fur, ther 16-bit information via the function block Acyclic controlling . You can determine which information should be transferred acyclically via PROFIBUS DP to the automation system. For this, the outputs (sockets) must be assigned to the corresponding plugs. The function block Acyclic controlling consists of 16 outputs (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information) 1 input (PROFIBUS DP). In total there is: 1 function block Acyclic controlling for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Acyclic controlling
Byte 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Byte 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Byte 2/3
DP
from PROFIBUS DP
Figure 7-7: Schematic of acyclic control data
Cyclic services Acyclic data is only transferred on request. The information (2 bytes) is in record 202. This record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
7-9
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Standard Function Blocks

In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about standard function blocks which you can activate as required. Standard function blocks often contain functions needed for motor feeders and are characterized by simple handling. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: configurators programmers of application programs for comprehension purposes. Necessary knowledge You need knowledge about: the principle of connecting plugs to sockets motor protection control functions, control stations. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under: More function blocks > Standard functions.
8-1
8.1
Introduction
The system also contains so-called standard function blocks which can be used if required. They can contain: inputs (plug ) outputs (sockets ) via a signal setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur (Signal Warn , or Switch off).
Description
Schematic The following schematic shows the general functioning of a standard function block:
Input 1 Standard function block Signal Input n Setting value
Figure 8-1: General functioning of a standard function block
Scope and application Standard function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used as optional additions. They are already available, and just have to be activated, which is achieved by wiring up the input (External fault standard function block). Depending on the device range, the system provides several function blocks:
SIMOCODE Standard function block pro C(BU1) pro V(BU2)
Number Test Reset Test position feedback (TPF) External fault Operational protection off (OPO) Power failure monitoring (UVO) Emergency start Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) Timestamping
Table 8-1: Standard function blocks
Number 2 3 1 6 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 4 1 1
SIMOCODE pro
8-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.2
Test/reset
The function of the test/reset button is generally dependent on the operating status of the device: Reset function: when a fault occurs Test function: other operating statuses The Test function block consists of: 1 Input a logic component (test/reset buttons locked). In total there are: 2 Test 1 and Test 2 function blocks for BU1 and BU2: Test 1: with testing/switching off the output relays Test 2: without switching off the output relays (normally for a test via the bus).
Test/reset description
Schematic
Test/Reset
Test 1 Test 2
Reset 1 Reset 2 Reset 3
control functions
Botton "TEST/RESET" BU Test/Reset buttons locked Botton "TEST/RESET" OP
Figure 8-2: Schematic "Test/Reset"
Carrying out the test The test can be carried out as follows: using the test/reset button on the basic unit and operator panel (can be deactivated) Test input 1/2 of the internal function block The test function can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model/overload function, i.e. after switching off using Test, it can immediately be switched back again. Switching off only occurs for Test 1 if the operation type is set to Remote .
8-3
Reset function: The reset function can be carried out as follows: using the test/reset button on the basic unit and operator panel (can be deactivated) using the Reset input of the internal function blocks The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The Reset function block consists of: 1 Input. In total there are: 3 function blocks, Reset 1 to 3 for BU1 and BU2. All reset inputs are equal (OR function). Test function A function test of SIMOCODE pro can also be installed using the test function. The test function contains the following steps: Lamp/LED test (test function activated < 2 s) Testing the device functionality (test function activated 2 to 5 s) Only for Test 1: Switching off the QE (test function activated > 5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
8-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Test phases The following table shows the test phases carried out when the test/ reset button is pressed for the respective period of time: Test phase Status Without main current
O.K. Fault *)
With main current

O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test DEVICE LED <2s GEN.FAULT LED Contactor control Show QL* Hardware/lamp test result DEVICE LED 2s-5s GEN.FAULT LED Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated Green Red Green Rot Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Green Green Green Green
Relay test DEVICE LED >5s GEN.FAULT LED Contactor control LED lit/activated Deactivated Deactivated LED flickering Deactivated LED off Deactivated Green Red Green Rot
LED flashing
*) Fault displayed after 2 s

Table 8-2: Statuses of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
Settings test
Test 1 to 2 Input
Description Activates the Test function block from any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are designed for acknowledgement of faults and for carrying out device tests. The keys can be locked using Test/reset button locked They can . then be used for other purposes.
Test/reset button locked
Table 8-3: Settings test
8-5
Acknowledging reset fault The following applies to the acknowledgement of faults: faults can be simply acknowledged when the cause of the fault has been eliminated if no ON control command is present. No reset will be carried out when a reset command is issued if the cause of the fault or an ON control command is still present. The reset is saved, depending on the type of fault. The saving of the reset is indicated by the GEN.FAULT LED on the basic unit and the control panel. The LEDs change from flashing to a continuous signal. Automatic acknowledgement of fault reset The acknowledgement of faults occurs automatically in the following cases: Case 1: A reset is saved and the cause of the fault disappears (user previously acknowledged) Case 2: An overload tripping or thermistor tripping is automatically reset if motor protection reset = Auto (the acknowledgement occurs automatically after the cooling off time expires). The motor cannot start immediately since a reset cannot occur if an ON command is present. Case 3: If a configured module fails, all associated faults are automatically acknowledged. However, a removal fault is generated (exception: operating panel during the corresponding parameterization). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically. Case 4a: If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via a parameterization), all associated faults are acknowledged automatically (the motor cannot start immediately since no parameter can be entered if an ON command is present). Case 4b: If a function's parameter is changed from Switch off to Warn , Signal or Deactivated all associated faults are automatically acknowled, ged. For an external fault: with its own parameter: Auto reset . Reset setting
Reset 1 to 3 Input Description Activates the Reset function block from any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are designed for acknowledgement of faults and carrying out device tests. The keys can be locked using Test/reset button locked They can . then be used for other purposes.
Test/reset button locked
Table 8-4: Reset setting
SIMOCODE pro
8-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.3
Test position feedback (TPF)

You can carry out the Cold starting function test using the test position feedback (TPF) function. The input (plug) must be connected to the corresponding socket. The active test position is indicated by a flashing QL*. The Test position feedback (TPF) function block consists of 1 Input 1 Status - test position output This is set when a signal is connected to the input. 1 Fault - test position feedback fault output. It is set when TPF is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder TPF is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder In total there is 1 Test position function block for BU1 and BU2. Notice: When the test position is activated, the QLE/QLA outputs are controlled by flashing.
Description
Schematic
TPF Input Type
Status Test position Fault Feedback fault test position
Figure 8-3: Feedback test position schematic
Cold starting If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected. The Cold starting function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is defined as the testing of the motor feeder without a current in the main circuit. This function must be activated via an input to differentiate this function from normal operation. The feedback that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage can be achieved using an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor feeder which is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then linked to the Test position feedback (TPF) input. Following this, the protection outputs can be set using the enabled control stations (see chapter "Control stations" on page 4-2), which enables the current-free status to be tested. If current falsely flows during the test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off with the message Fault - Test position feedback fault .
8-7
Fault - Test position feedback (TPF) fault message and acknowledgement Attention Fault - Test position feedback (TPF) is generated when: TPF is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder TPF is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder It can be acknowledged using Reset or the OFF/STOP control command. Settings
External fault 1 to 6 Input
Description
Controls the test position feedback (TPF) using any signal (any sockets , e.g. device input) Specifies the input logic NO contact (1-active) NC contact (0-active)
Type
Table 8-5: Test position feedback (TPF) setting
SIMOCODE pro
8-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.4
External fault
External faults 1-6 can optionally be used to monitor any statuses and/or external devices and to create fault messages. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.). Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the , motor using an external rotational-speed monitor. The External fault function block consists of 2 inputs evaluation 1 Signal - external fault output. This is set when a signal is connected to the input. In total there are: 4 external fault function blocks (1 to 4) for BU1 6 external fault function blocks (1 to 6) for BU2.
Description
Schematic
External fault 1 Input Type Effectiveness Reset Response Reset (Labeling) External fault 3 Input Type Effectiveness Reset Response Reset (Labeling) External fault 5 Input Type Effectiveness Reset Response Reset (Labeling) Signal Ext. fault 5 Reset Input Signal Ext. fault 3 Reset Input Signal Ext. fault 1 Reset Input
External fault 2 Type Effectiveness Response Reset (Labeling) External fault 4 Type Effectiveness Response Reset (Labeling) External fault 6 Type Effectiveness Response Reset (Labeling) Signal Ext. fault 6 Signal Ext. fault 4 Signal Ext. fault 2
Figure 8-4: Schematic of external faults
Special reset possibilities: A reset input is also available in addition to the other reset possibilities (remote reset, test/reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated. For this, see the chapter "External fault signal" on page 8-10.
8-9
Settings
External faults 1 to 6 Input
Description
Activates the External fault function block using the monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Status: Specifies the input logic: NO contact (1-active) NC contact (0-active) (default setting) Specifies in which motor operating status the external fault should be evaluated: Always: Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or stationary. only when the motor is on: Evaluation only when the motor is switched on. Specifies the response to an external fault when activated using the input. (See the following table and the Kapitel "Important Notes") Acknowledges the External fault fault using any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) ,
Type
Effectiveness
Response
Reset
Reset also through Specifies further (common) acknowledgement possibilities using additional reset types: Test/reset button on the basic unit and the control panel (panel reset) Remote reset: Acknowledgement though resets 1-3, DPV1, Reset command Auto reset: Fault resets itself after the cause of the fault has been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal) OFF command reset: OFF control command resets the fault. (Labelling) No parameters. Optional labelling to describe the signal, e.g. Rotational speed > e.g. using SIMOCODE ES. , Range: up to 10 characters
Table 8-6: External fault settings
External fault signal

Response Fault / switch off Warning Signal Disabled Delay
Table 8-7: External fault signal
External fault X X X -
SIMOCODE pro
8-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.5
8.5.1
Operational protection OFF (OPO)

Response for slider control function
Description This function puts the slider into the safe mode. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.). , The Operational protection off function block consists of 1 Input 1 Status - OPO output. This is set when a signal is connected to the input. 1 Fault - OPO fault output. It is set when the corresponding, safe end position is reached. In total there is: 1 function block Operational protection off (OPO) for BU2. The following table shows the main functionality:
OPO Slider is open
Initial position when OPO occurs Slider opens Slider stopped/off Slider closes Slider is closed
Reaction to OPO Parameterized Slider closed response Fault Reset: with close command Closes Parameterized Slider open response Fault Reset: with close command Closes Fault Reset: with close command Closes -
Closes
Fault Fault Fault Reset: with Reset: with Reset: with open command open command open command Opens Opens Opens
Opens
Table 8-8: Main functionality of Operational protection off (OPO) for slider control function
Schematic
Operational protection off (OPO) Input Slider response Type
Status Operational protection off (OPO) Fault Operational protection off (OPO)
Figure 8-5: Operational protection off (OPO) schematic
8-11
Settings
Operational protection off (OPO) Input
Description
Activates of the Operational protection off function block using the monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, etc.) Specifies the response for the slider control function when activated via the input: CLOSE: Slider goes to the Closed end position OPEN: Slider goes to the Open end position Species the input logic NO contact (1-active) NC contact (0-active)
Slider response
Type
Table 8-9: Operational protection off settings
Notes
No Fault - Operational protection off (OPO) fault message is created if the OPO command tries to move the slider to the position where it already is or to the position towards which it is already heading. No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried out while Operational protection off (OPO) is active. The Fault - Operation protection off (OPO) fault message must be acknowledged using the open or close control command, depending on the slider's present end position. The acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet been reached. The fault message can be used to diagnose the PROFIBUS DP .
8.5.2
Response to other control functions
Description For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated if OPO is used: The motor is running: The motor switches off with a Fault - Operational protection off (OPO) fault. The motor is off. Initially no fault. The Fault - Operational protection off (OPO) fault only occurs when the ON command is issued.
SIMOCODE pro
8-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.6
Power failure monitoring (UVO)

The Power failure monitoring (UVO) is activated using the input. This is achieved using an external relay. Process (see process diagram below). 1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after the monitoring-input relay/activation of the input (UVO) have been addressed.
2) The motor switches back into its previous status if the voltage returns within the Power failure time This can either take place immediately or an additio. nal time delay can be included (restart delay). 3) If the Power failure time expires before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault (UVO fault).
Description
Condition: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and is not interrupted. Schematic
UVO Input* Type Power failure time Restart delay *Activation External power failure monitoring
Fault Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Figure 8-6: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram
1)
QE
2)
UVO
t
Power failure time
Power failure time
3)
Fault Fault
Figure 8-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO)
8-13
Settings
Power failure monitoring (UVO) Input
Description
Activates the Power failure monitoring function block using the monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Specifies the type of power failure monitoring: deactivated device supply is not interrupted The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant. The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured by a separate voltage relay (for example). The time at which the power failure starts. If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time period, all the drives that were connected before the power failure are automatically reconnected. If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the drives remain disconnected and the Fault - Power failure UVO fault message is generated. The fault message can be acknowledged using Reset once the mains voltage returns. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds
Type
Power failure time
Restart delay (stag- The restart delay can be set so that not all motors restart at the gered) same time (mains voltage would collapse again). Range: 0 to 255 seconds
Table 8-10: Power failure monitoring settings
SIMOCODE pro
8-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.7
Emergency start
The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after an overload tripping. This function can be used to: make an immediate restart/reset possible after an overload switch-off influence the operation of the thermal memory (motor model) if required. Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this function to continuously affect the thermal motor model. The emergency start is carried out as follows: Via the input. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.). , The Emergency start function block consists of: 1 Input 1 Status - emergency start carried out output. It is set when the emergency start is carried out. In total there is: 1 emergency start function block for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Emergency start Input
Status Emergency start carried out 1)
Figure 8-8: Emergency start schematic
Settings
Emergency start Input
Description Activates the Emergency start function block using any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) ,
Table 8-11: Emergency start settings
1) The Emergency start carried out signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset when current flows.
8-15
8.8
Watchdog (bus monitoring, PLC/DCS monitoring)

The Watchdog standard function block monitors both the communication with the PLC using PROFIBUS DP as well as the operating status of the PLC in the Remote operation type.
Description
Schematic Bus monitoring: With this type of monitoring, Fault - Bus is generated if Bus monitoring is active the cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted, e.g. by an interruption to the PROFIBUS DP connection when in the Remote operation type (operation type switch S1=1 and S2=1). The Status - Bus O.K. can always be evaluated. If the SIMOCODE pro is cyclically transferring data with PLC, the Status - Bus O.K. is set to 1 .
Watchdog (Bus monit.)
Cyclic communication
Bus/PLC-fault - Reset Bus monitoring Bus response
Status - Bus O.K. (Bus active)
Bus fault
Figure 8-9: Bus monitoring
Response: Also see Table 8-13: Bus fault / PLC/DCS fault response and Kapitel "Important Notes". PLC/DCS monitoring: With this type of monitoring, Fault - PLC/DCS is generated if PLC/DCS monitoring is activated. the PROFIBUS DP switches to the CLEAR status when in the Remote operation type (operation type switch S1=1 and S2=1). Status - PLC/DCS in Run can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in the CLEAR status, the Status - PLC/DCS in Run is set to 0 . If the PLC/DCS monitoring - input is set by default to the Cyclic control Bit 0.7 bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit alone.
SIMOCODE pro
8-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Watchdog (PLC/DCS monit.)
Cyclic communication
Bus/PLC-fault - Reset Bus monitoring PLC/DCS monitoring
Status - PLC/DCS in Run
Fault - PLC/DCS PLC/DCS monitoring - input (level sensitive)
Figure 8-10: PLC/DCS monitoring
Response: See also Table 8-13: Bus fault / PLC/DCS fault response and Kapitel "Important Notes".
Watchdog PLC/DCS monitoring - input
Description Activates the Watchdog function block using the monitored signal (optional sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the Fault - Bus fault message is generated, which must be acknowledged Deactivated: No fault message Activated: If an SPS fault occurs, the Fault - PLC/DCS fault message is generated, which must be acknowledged Deactivated: No fault message You can select whether the faults are acknowledged automatically or manually. Range: Manual / automatic
Bus monitoring
Monitoring PLC/DCS
Bus/PLC fault reset
Table 8-12: Watchdog settings
Bus fault / PLC/DCS fault response

Response Fault Warning Signal Not active Bus fault X X PLC/DCS fault X X
Table 8-13: Bus fault / PLC/DCS fault response
8-17
8.9
8.9.1
Timestamping
Time stamping in the fault memory The time stamping in the fault memory is based on the operating hours of SIMOCODE pro (resolution: 1 s). The Error/ Fault events and Mains on are recorded. Each of these events is annotated with a timestamp. Error / Fault: The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer. The fault that occurs (rising edge) is always recorded. A fault that is disappearing (falling edge) is not recorded. Mains on: If the most recent entry was Mains on this is not recorded multiple times. , Rather, the fault number is used as a network-on fault. This means that the fault memory cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations. Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest. The data is displayed using the SIMOCODE ES software. Example:
Screenshot
Figure 8-11: Example of event recording using the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
8-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the logic modules of SIMOCODE pro. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can, for example, implement logical functions, time relays functions and counter functions. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: configurators programmers. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: the principle of connecting plugs to sockets basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timer, counter etc. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under: Further function blocks > Logic modules.
9-1
Logic Modules
9.1
Introduction
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and provide digital output signals. Logic modules can contain: inputs (plugs ) an internal logic component outputs (sockets ) settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Description
Schematic The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:

Input 1 Logic module Output
(Logic component)
Input n
Setting
Figure 9-1: General representation of a logic module
Extent and application If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:
SIMOCODE BU1 BU2
Number Truth tables for 3 inputs/1 output Truth tables for 2 inputs/1 output Truth tables for 5 inputs/2 outputs Timers Counters Signal conditioners Non-volatile elements Flashing Flickering Limit monitor
Table 9-1: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
Number 6 2 1 4 4 4 4 3 3 4
3 2 2 2 2 3 3
SIMOCODE pro
9-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.2
Truth table for 3I/1O

The truth table for 3I/1O contains 3 inputs a logic component 1 output. You can choose among 8 possible input conditions with which you want to create an output signal. In total there are: 3 truth tables, 1 to 3, for BU1 6 truth tables, 1 to 6, for BU2
Description
Schematic
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Truth table1, 3I/1O Output
Truth table 2, 3I/1O Output
Figure 9-2: Schematic truth tables for 3I/1O
9-3
Logic Modules
Example You want to implement the following circuit:

Circuit: S1= Input 1 S1 S2 0 0 0 S3 0 K1 1 1 K1 switches with: (S1 or S2) and S3 or S1 and S2 and S3
Figure 9-3: Example of a truth table
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray: S2= Input 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 S3= Input 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 K1= Output 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 1
SIMOCODE pro
9-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Switching and parameterizing

L1 Circuit: N K1
BU input
S1 S2 S3
BU 1 1 2 3 4 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Truth table 1, 3I/1O Output 2 3
BU output
Out1
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Setting of bits for output signals
Connecting inputs, i.e. connecting the plugs with the sockets
Figure 9-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table for 3I/1O
Settings
Truth table for 1-6 3I/1O Input 1 to 3
Description
Activate the truth table with any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) ,
Table 9-2: Settings for 3I/1O truth table
9-5
Logic Modules
9.3

The truth table for 2I/1O contains 2 inputs a logic component 1 output. You can choose among 4 possible input conditions with which you want to create an output signal. In total there are: 2 truth tables 7 to 8 for BU2
Description
Schematic
Input 1
Truth table 7 2I/1O Output
Input 1
Truth table 8 2I/1O Output
Input 2
Input 2
Figure 9-5: Schematic for 2I/1O truth tables
Example You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit: Truth table, input conditions colored in gray: S1 S2 S1= Input 1 0 0 1 K1 K1 switches with : S1 or S2 1 S2= Input 2 0 1 0 1 K1= Output 0 1 1 1
Figure 9-6: Example for 2I/1O truth table
SIMOCODE pro
9-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.4

The truth table 5I/2O contains 5 inputs a logic component 2 outputs. You can choose among 32 possible input conditions with which you want to create up to 2 output signals. In total there are: 1 truth table 9 for BU2.
Description
Schematic
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Output 2
Truth table 9 for 5I/2O Output 1
Figure 9-7: Schematic 5I/2O truth table
Settings
Truth table 9 for 5I/ 2O Input 1 to 5
Description
Activation by any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) ,
Table 9-3: Settings for truth table for 5I/2O
9-7
Logic Modules
9.5
Counters
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the inputs + or - . The counter output switches to 1 when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with Reset . The current count value can be read out cyclically via the bus. It must be entered as an analog value. Input +: increases actual value by 1 Input : decreases actual value by 1 (minimum: 0). Reset: resets the actual value to 0. The counter contains 3 inputs (input +, input and reset) a counter function 1 output. In total there are: 2 counters 1 to 2 for BU1 4 counters 1 to 4 for BU2
Description
Schematic
Input + Input Reset Limit Input + Output Input Reset Limit
Counter 1
Counter 2 Output
Input + Input Reset
Counter 3 Output Limit
Input + Input Reset
Counter 4 Output Limit
Figure 9-8: Schematic counter
Notes Please observe the following notes: The time between the events to be counted depends on the input delay the device cycle time (see chapter Technical data). The actual value remains the same during parameterization or failure of supply voltage if there is a simultaneous input signal at input + and input -. Notice: When a reset is pending, the output is always 0.
SIMOCODE pro
9-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Settings
Counter 1 to 4 Input +
Description Increases the actual value by 1 Activation by any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Decreases the actual value by 1. Activation by any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output) Activation by any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where the counter provides an output signal. Range: 0 to 65535
Input
Reset
Limit
Table 9-4: Counter settings
9-9
Logic Modules
9.6
Timer
The timer contains 2 inputs (input and reset) 1 output. If there is an input signal, the timer can provide an output signal with the output response with closing delay with closing delay with memory with off delay with fleeting closing. In total there are: 2 timers 1 to 2 for BU1 4 timers 1 to 4 for BU2 timer current value.
Description of function
Schematic
Input
Timer 1 Output Type
Input
Timer 2 Output Type
Reset Value Input
Reset Value Input Output Type Type Reset Value Value
Timer 3
Timer 4 Output
Reset
Figure 9-9: Schematic of timer
Note The output is always 0 following a reset.
SIMOCODE pro
9-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Output response
With closing delay: Input Reset Time

t t
Output
Closing delay with memory: Input Reset Time

t
Output
With OFF delay: Input Reset Time

t t
Output
With fleeting closing: Input Reset Time

t
Output
Figure 9-10: Output response of the timer
9-11
Logic Modules
Settings
Timer 1 to 4 Input
Description Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Resets the timer to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Various output responses Range: with closing delay, closing delay with memory, with OFF delay, with fleeting closing Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the output response (type). Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Reset
Type
Value
Table 9-5: Timer settings
SIMOCODE pro
9-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.7
Signal conditioner
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal with the output response not inverting inverting edge rising with memory edge falling with memory You can select the type of output response. The signal conditioner contains 2 inputs (input and reset) a logic 1 output. In total there are: 2 signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioner 1 to 2) 4 signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioner 1 to 4).
Description
Schematic
Input Input Output Reset Type Reset Type
Signal conditioner 1
Signal conditioner 2 Output
Input
Input
Reset Type
Reset Type
Figure 9-11: Schematic of the signal conditioner
9-13
Logic Modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverting Input Reset Output
Level inverting Input Reset Output
Edge rising with memory Input Reset Output
Edge falling with memory Input Reset Output
Figure 9-12: Types of signals/output response of the signal conditioners
SIMOCODE pro
9-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
NOR function You can implement a NOR function with the signal type Level inverted:
Input 0 1 0 1
Table 9-6: NOR function
Reset 0 0 1 1
Output 1 0 0 0
Input Reset
Schematic
> =
Output
Settings
Signal conditioner 1 to 4 Input
Description
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Resets the signal conditioner to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Different output responses Range: Level not inverted, level inverted without memory, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Reset
Type
Table 9-7: Signal condition settings
9-15
Logic Modules
9.8
Non-volatile elements
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners. The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage. If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal with the output response not inverting inverting edge rising with memory edge falling with memory You can set the output response. The non-volatile element contains 2 inputs (input and reset) a logic 1 output. In total there are: 2 non-volatile elements1 to 2 for BU1 4 non-volatile elements1 to 4 for BU2
Description
Schematic
Input
Non-volat. elem. 1 Output
Input
Reset Type
Reset Type
Input
Input
Reset Type
Reset Type
Figure 9-13: Schematic for non-volatile elements
SIMOCODE pro
9-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverted Input Reset Output
Level inverted Input Reset Output
Edge rising with memory Input Reset Output
Voltage failure
Edge falling with memory Input Reset Ausgang
Voltage failure
Figure 9-14: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements
9-17
Logic Modules
NOR function You can implement a NOR function with the level inverted type of signal:
Input 0 1 0 1
Table 9-8: NOR function
Reset 0 0 1 1
Output 1 0
Reset Input
Schematic
Output
0 0
> =
Settings
Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 Input
Description
Activation by any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Resets the signal conditioner to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP etc.) , Different output responses Range: Level not inverted, level inverted without memory, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Reset
Type
Table 9-9: Non-volatile elements settings
SIMOCODE pro
9-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.9
Flashing
With the flashing function blocks, you can e.g. assign the flashing function to the operator panel LEDs (for example). The flashing function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 2 Hz if there is an input signal. The function block contains 1 input flashing frequency 1 output. In total there are: 3 flash function blocks, 1 to 3, for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Flashing 1 Input Output Input
Flashing 2 Output
Flashing 3 Input Output
Figure 9-15: Schematic for flashing
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 Input
Description Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)
Table 9-10: Flashing settings
9-19
Logic Modules
9.10
Flickering
With the flickering function blocks, you can e.g. assign the flickering function to the operator panel LEDs (for example). The flickering function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz if there is an input signal. The function block contains 1 input flickering frequency 1 output. In total there are: 3 flickering functions, 1 to 3, for BU1 and BU2.
Description
Schematic
Flickering 1 Input Output Input
Flickering 2 Output
Flickering 3 Input Output
Figure 9-16: Schematic for flickering
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. signals, etc.)
Description
Table 9-11: Flickering settings
SIMOCODE pro
9-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.11
Limit monitor
Any analog signals (length: 2 bytes) can be monitored for limit overshooting or undershooting. The limit monitor provides a Signal - limit output signal. Example: Monitoring the mains voltage for overvoltage. The limit monitor contains 1 analog input a logic component 1 output. In total there are: 4 limit monitors 1 to 4 for BU2
Description
Schematic
Limit monitor 1 Type

Input (analog)
Limit monitor 2 Signal Limit value 1

Input (analog)
Type Limit Effectiveness Response (Labeling)
Limit Effectiveness Response (Labeling)
Signal Limit value 2
Limit monitor 3 Type

Input (analog)
Limit monitor 4 Signal Limit value 3

Input (analog)
Type Limit Effectiveness Response (Labeling)
Limit Effectiveness Response (Labeling)
Signal Limit value 4
Figure 9-17: Schematic of limit monitor
Response
Response Switch off Warn Signal Disabled Delay Limit 1 to 4 X (d) 0 to 25.5 s
Table 9-12: Response of the limits
See also Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro in chapter "Important Notes".
9-21
Logic Modules
Settings
Limit monitor Input (analog, 2 bytes)
Description Activation of the word via any analog signals (any sockets , e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of timers, etc.) Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or undershooting. Determines in what motor operating state the limit monitor is to be analyzed: on, i.e. always analyze, independent of whether the motor is running or not (default) on+, i.e. always analyze, independent of whether the motor is running or not Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position. run, i.e., analyze only if the motor is in the ON state (TPF) run+, i.e. analyze only if the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished (i.e. the Start active message is not applied) and there is no test position (TPF); Example: Monitoring the power factor Operating value of monitoring. The return value is always determined by the Limit monitor - delay parameter. Range: 0 to 65535. Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly exceeded before the Signal - limit output is set. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds.
Type
Effectiveness
Limit
Delay
Table 9-13: Limit monitor settings
Functional principle The limit signal issued depends on the operating state of the motor the TPF function the parmeterized effectiveness: on on+ run run+.
SIMOCODE pro
9-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
The following display shows a flow chart with the different effectiveness parameters.
Class-time
Off
Start
Motor is running
Off On
Not with TPF Not with TPF Not with TPF
On+ Run Run+
Figure 9-18: Functional principle of the limit monitor
9-23
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
9-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
In this chapter
10
In this chapter you will find information about the possibilities of SIMOCODE pro communication, e.g. with a PLC. The presetting of the control, signaling and diagnostic data is sufficient for almost all applications so that the parameterization only has to be changed a little. Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your application. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: configurators PLC programmers. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: the principle of connecting plugs to sockets knowledge about PROFIBUS DP . Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES: Device parameters > Bus parameters Further function blocks > Outputs >Acyclic signaling data Further function blocks >Outputs >Cyclic signaling data
10-1
Communication
10.1
10.1.1
Introduction
Definitions
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central DP master and the periphery devices. PROFIBUS DPV1 PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. With this, acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data is also possible. DP master A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 norm, volume 2, PROFIBUS. Class 1 master A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP Characteristic is . the cyclic data exchange with other stations. Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection. Class 2 master A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP Typical class 2 . masters are, for example, PC/programing devices with the SIMOCODE-ES professional software SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) PC with SIMARIS manager software (power management). DPV1 slave A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 norm, volume 2, PROFIBUS. GSD (device data) Device data (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a standard format. Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slave in a DP master system. OM SIMOCODE pro OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data) to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP 7. OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is installed) for parameterizing within STEP7.
SIMOCODE pro
10-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7 and has the following characteristics. It is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro instead of GSD (device data). It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process alarms) Writing data Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system. Reading data Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro system.
10-3
Communication
10.2
Transmitting data
The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Class 1 master SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor Class 2 master PC or programming device with SIMOCODE ES Professional Maximum of two class 2 masters possible
Options for data transfer
Data transfer to class 1 master, depending on the slave mode of operation: (table below, slave modes of operation)
PROFIBUS DPV1 norm extension: parameterizing, diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1
PC/programming device e.g. with SIMOCODE ES Smart Parameterizing, diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via system interface Figure 10-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle The following figure shows the communication principle where, depending on the master and slave modes of operation, different data is transmitted:
Class 1 master Cyclic I/O Acyclic PLC-CPU Acyclic Class 2 master (max. 2) Acyclic PC or DCS e.g. SIMOCODE ES Professional
PLC
Communication processor Configuration GSD
Start-up parameter block SIMOCODE pro
3UF7
Cycl. signaling data Cycl. control data
Diagnostics DPV0 DPV1
Alarms
Parameters
Data records
Data records
DPV1
Figure 10-2: Communication principle
SIMOCODE pro
10-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
Slave modes of operation The following table shows an overview of the slave modes of operation which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
SIMOCODE pro connected as: Class 1 master DP master manufacturerindependent, without DPV1 alarms DPV1 slave via GSD (device data) Cyclical data transfer Norm diagnostics Status messages Parameterization starting (only BU1) Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data records (if supported by the master) Class 1 master DP master manufacturerindependent, with DPV1 alarms Cyclic data transfer Norm diagnostics Status messages Process and diagnostic alarm Parameterization starting (only BU1) Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data records Cyclic data transfer Norm diagnostics Status messages Process and diagnostic alarm Parameterization starting (only BU1) Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data records Cyclic data transfer Norm diagnostics Process and diagnostic alarm Parameterization starting Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data records S7 master
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE ES
Figure 10-3: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro
Preparing the data transfer SIMOCODE pro must be connected to a DP master system for data transfer. For this, you must configure in two places: You must decide on one of the options in the above-mentioned table (GSD (device data) or OM) You must prepare SIMOCODE pro e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. There you can set the following parameters in the dialog Device parameters > Bus parameters: DP address diagnostics start-up parameter block
10-5
Communication
10.3
10.3.1
Configuring SIMOCODE pro

Configuring with a GSD file
Definition of GSD Device data (GSD) contain DP slave descriptions in a standard format. Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to configure the DP master and the DP slave. Connecting SIMOCODE pro as a norm slave with a GSD file You configure SIMOCODE pro via the GSD file. SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file from the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd (under Schaltgerte i.e. switchgear). via a modem under the telephone number +49 (0)911 737972. The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C: SI0180FD.GSG (German) SI0180FD.GSE (English) The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V: SI1180FD.GSG (German) SI1180FD.GSE (English)
Attention If you want to use the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g. timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - rev.5, like e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
SIMOCODE pro
10-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file into SIMATIC S7:
Step 1 2 STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2 Start STEP 7 and call the menu command Extras > Install new GSD file in the HW configuration. In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with OK. Result: The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the PROFIBUS DP directory. Insert from the SIMOCODE pro hardware catalog under Further field devices >Switchgear > SIMOCODE pro > SIMOCODE pro V (GSD) (device data) or SIMOCODE pro C (GSD) (device data) on the PROFIBUS. 3 Configure SIMOCODE pro with STEP 7 (see integrated help in STEP 7).
Table 10-1: Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software
Parameterizing via GSD Attention Parameterization via GSD is only designed for SIMOCODE pro C. The GSD for SIMOCODE pro V does not contain any device parameters.
10-7
Communication
10.3.2
Configuring with the SIMOCODE ES software You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMOCODE ES software. There are several options available for this: SIMOCODE ES Smart, for parameterizing via system interface. Order number: 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0 SIMOCODE ES Professional, for parameterizing via the DPV1 interface and system interface. This version contains the object manager (OM) SIMOCODE pro. This enables the connection of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave in STEP7 and the integration in STEP7. Order number: 3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0. There you will find SIMOCODE pro under Switchgear > SIMOCODE pro.
10.3.3
Configuring with SIMATIC PDM You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software. There are several options available for this: SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program Prerequisite: Programming device/PC with PROFIBUS DP interface which is supported by SIMATIC PDM. SIMOCODE pro is parameterized via PROFIBUS DP . SIMATIC PDM integrated into STEP7 Prerequisite for data record routing: SIMATIC S7-400 with PROFIBUS DP interface connection which supports the whole data record routing for the parameterization of field devices (CP443-5 Extended) or with IE/PB link. Note Note that the parameter block must be set so that the parameters will not be overwritten by the start-up parameterization!
SIMOCODE pro
10-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.4
Cyclic data
Telegram description
The cyclic data is exchanged once every DP cycle between the PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the signaling data to the master module. By parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, you can select between two basic types which determine the contents of the cyclic data: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Specification Basic type 1 (available from the middle of 2005) Length Specification Info BU2 4 bytes control data Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 Cyclic controlling - analog value Basic type 2 2 bytes control data Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU1 BU2
Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Specification Basic type 1 (available from the middle of 2005) Length 10 bytes Signaling data Specification Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 Cyclic signaling - analog input 1 to 4 Basic type 2 4 bytes signaling data Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 Cyclic signaling - analog input 1 BU1 BU2 Info BU2
Diagnostic data/alarms The diagnostic data contains important information about the status of SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting. In contrast to the cyclic data, the diagnostic data is only transmitted to the master module if it changes. PROFIBUS DP differentiates between: Norm diagnostics Status messages Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1. You will find the detailed description in the appendix.
10-9
Communication
Starting up parameter data For every start-up of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP parameters are , transmitted to the device. Depending on the master module used, norm parameters or norm parameters + SIMOCODE pro parameters are transmitted. Notice: If the effective device parameters of SIMOCODE pro are overwritten by the start-up parameters, start-up parameter block = no must be set. For start-up parameter block = yes, the start-up parameters are discarded and the effective SIMOCODE pro parameters remain active.
The start-up parameters are set with the configuration tool when the GSD file is loaded (only BU1) with OM SIMOCODE ES Professional (when connected as an S7 slave).
Acyclic writing and reading of data records You can use these functions according to DPV1 if the DP master supports this. Part of these are the acyclic DPV1 services for reading and writing data records. With this, operator control, process monitoring and parameterization is possible during runtime.
10.5
Process image (cyclic data) and data records (acyclic data)

The process image is part of the system memory of the DP master. At the start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the inputs are transmitted to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclic program, the process image of the outputs is transferred as a signal state to the DP slave.
Process image
Data records Data records contain additional information which can only be read/partly written. Data record 67 contains the information about the process image of the outputs. Data record 69 contains the information about the process image of the inputs. Both these data records can only be read. You will find further information on the data records in chapter "Data Formats and Data Records" starting from page B-1.
SIMOCODE pro
10-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6
10.6.1
Diagnostics with STEP 7

Reading out the diagnostics
Length of the diagnostic telegram

The telegram has a maximum length of 62 bytes.
Options for reading out the diagnostics

Automation system with DP master SIMATIC S7/M7 Block or register Application in STEP 7 SFC 13 DP NRM_DG Reading out slave diagnostics (store in the data region of the user program) See...
chapter "Configuring the slave diagnostics" on page 10-12; SFC see online help in STEP 7
Table 10-2: Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7
Example for reading out the S7 diagnostics with SFC 13 DP NRM_DG Here you will find an example of how to read out the slave diagnostics for a DP slave in the STEP 7 user program with the SFC 13. Assumptions The following assumptions apply for this STEP 7 user program:
The diagnostic address is 1022 (3FEH). The slave diagnostics should be stored in DB82: From the address 0.0, length 62 bytes. The slave diagnostics consist of 62 bytes.
STEP 7 user program

STL (statement list) Explanation
CALL
SFC 13
REQ LADDR
:=TRUE :=W#16#3FE
read request diagnostic address RET_VAL from SFC 13 data compartment for diagnostics in the DB82 read process runs over several OB1 cycles
RET_VAL :=MW0 RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 62 BUSY :=M2.0
10-11
Communication
10.6.2
Configuring the slave diagnostics
Configuring the slave diagnostics

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31
Station status 1 to 3
Master PROFIBUS address High byte Low byte Manufacturer's identification
Identification-related diagnostics
up to max. Byte 34 Byte 35
. . .
. . . . . .
Channel-related diagnostics (3 bytes per entry)
. . .
Alarms
OB40 OB82
up to max. Byte 62
Figure 10-4: Configuring the slave diagnostics
Attention The length of the diagnostic telegram varies between 28 and 62 bytes. You will find the length of the last diagnostic telegram received in STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13.
SIMOCODE pro
10-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Details
. . .
Status message
Communication
10.6.3 Definition
Station status 1 to 3
Station status 1 to 3 gives an overview of the state of a DP slave.
Station status 1
Bit 0 Meaning 1:The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP master. Cause/corrective measures Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave? Is the bus connection plug connected? Voltage on the DP slave? RS-485 repeater configured correctly? Reset implemented on the DP slave? Wait, as the DP slave is just starting-up.
1 2
1:The DP slave is not yet ready for the data transfer.
1:The configuration data sent from the DP Correct station type or correct configuration of master to the DP slave does not correthe DP slave in the configuration software? spond to the configuration of the DP slave. 1:There are external diagnostics present (general diagnostic display) Evaluate the identification-related diagnostics, the status messages and/or the channel-related diagnostics. As soon as all errors are rectified, bit 3 is reset. The bit is reset if there is a new diagnostic message in the bytes of the abovementioned diagnostics.
1:The function required is not supported Check the configuration. by the DP slave (e.g. changing the PROFIBUS address via software). 1:DP master cannot interpret the response of the DP slave. 1:The DP slave type does not correspond to the software configuration. Check the bus configuration. Is the correct station type entered in the configuration software?
5 6 7
1:The DP slave has been parameterized by Bit is always 1 when you are e.g. accessing the another DP master (not by the DP DP slave from the programming device or from master which has access to the DP another DP master. slave at the moment). The PROFIBUS address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave is in the Master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte.
Table 10-3: Configuring the station status 1 (byte 0)
10-13
Communication
Station status 2
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Meaning 1:The DP slave must be parameterized anew. 1:There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave does not work until the error is rectified (static diagnostic message). 1:The bit is always 1 when the slave is present with this PROFIBUS address. 1:The address monitoring is activated for this slave. 1:The DP slave received the FREEZE control command1). 1:The DP slave received the SYNC control command1). 0: Bit is always 0 . 1:The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message is changed.

Table 10-4: Configuring station status 2 (byte 1)
Station status 3
Bit 0 to 6 7 Meaning 0: 1: Bits are always 0 . There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can save. The DP master cannot enter all diagnostic messages sent from the DP slave into its diagnostic buffer (channel-related diagnostics).
Table 10-5: Configuring station status 3 (byte 2)
SIMOCODE pro
10-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.4 Definition
Master PROFIBUS address
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the Master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte:
which the DP slave parameterized and which has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 4 of the slave diagnostics. 10.6.5 Definition There is a code stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP slave type. Manufacturer's identification
Byte 5 80H Byte 6 FDH Manufacturer's identification for SIMOCODE pro
Manufacturer's identification
Table 10-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
10-15
Communication
10.6.6 Definition
Identification-related diagnostics
The identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 7 and is 2 bytes long. Identification-related diagnostics The identification-related diagnostics is configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number: Byte 7 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 = 0x42

Length of the identification-related diagnostics including byte 6 (= 2 bytes) Code for identification-related diagnostics
6 5
0 Bit number
GSD (device data)
Byte 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available 1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
6 5
0 Bit number
OM SIMOCODE pro
Byte 8 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available 1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
Figure 10-5: Configuration of the identification-related diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
10-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.7 Definition
Status messages
The status messages yield the detailed status of SIMOCODE. Status messages configuration The status messages are configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number = 0x14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Length of the status message including byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
Byte 9
7
Byte 10
0 0x81
Status message
7
Byte 11 Byte 12
0 x 0x00
Slot number GSD: 0x01 OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
7
Byte 13
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
. . .
Detailed status
Byte 28
Figure 10-6: Status messages configuration
You will find the detailed messages in the section "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics" in chapter "Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis" on page A-13.
10-17
Communication
10.6.8 Definition
Channel-related diagnostics
Channel-related diagnostics give information about device errors from SIMOCODE pro and represent a more detailed version of the identificationrelated diagnostics. Channel-related diagnostics The channel-related diagnostics are configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 29 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x80 GSD 0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro Code for channel-related diagnostics
7 6 5 0 Bit number Byte 30 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 31 0 0 0
Error type 9 or 16 (table below) Channel type:
000B: No special channel type

Byte 32 to Byte 34 Next channel-related diagnostics message (Allocation as for byte 29 to 31)
Figure 10-7: Configuring the channel-related diagnostics
Error types The diagnostic message is signaled on channel 0.

Error numb er F9 Error type Meaning/cause
01001: Error 10000: Parameterization error
Internal error/device error Error on self-test Switchgear defective Incorrect parameter value
Exact information in data record 92
F16
Table 10-7: Error types
SIMOCODE pro
10-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.9
Alarms
Diagnostic alarm Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms. As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7. Process alarm Process messages, warnings and errors are alarm sources for process alarms. Configuring the process alarms is the same as for the status messages. As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7. Process alarm configuration
7 6 5 0 Bit number = 0x14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

Length of the process alarm including header byte (= 20 bytes)
7 0x02 7 x 0x00 7
0
Process alarm
0
Slot number GSD: 0x01 OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
. . .
Detailed status
Figure 10-8: Configuring alarm configuration
You will find the detailed messages in the section "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics" in chapter "Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis" on page A-13.
10-19
Communication
10.6.10
Data records - overview
Data record number 67 69 92 94 95 130 131 132 133 139 160 165 202 203 224
Description
Read/write
Process image of the outputs Process image of the inputs Device diagnostics Measured values Display and statistics data Basic device parameter 1 Basic device parameter 2 Extended device parameter 1 Extended device parameter 2 Labeling Communication parameters Comment Free acyclic control data Free acyclic signaling data Password protection
Read Read Read Read Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read Write
Table 10-8: Data records - overview
SIMOCODE pro
10-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces
11
In this chapter This chapter contains information about how the individual SIMOCODE pro components are mounted and wired. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: mechanics electricians maintenance and service personnel. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
11-1
11.1
Notes
General information about mounting and wiring
Warning Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention Follow the information contained in the operating manual. Fixing lugs for screw attachments Attention For technical reasons, there are two sorts of mounting lugs for screw attachments: For basic units and expansion modules: Order no. 3RP1903 For current measurement modules, 45 mm and 55 mm width: Order no. 3RP1900-0B Detachable terminals Attention The detachable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular position!
SIMOCODE pro
11-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.2
11.2.1
Mounting
Mounting the basic units and expansion modules You can attach these system components in the following manner: Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail without requiring tools Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto 45 mm and 55 mm wide current measurement modules (up to 100 A) with an integrated standard mounting rail, without requiring tools Screw attachment with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903) and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units and expansion modules!
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails SIMOCODE pro C BU1 SIMOCODE pro V with increased mounting depth BU2 Expansion module
Snap-on mounting onto the current measurement module e.g. 45 mm wide current measurement module with BU1
Standard mounting rails
Screw attachment 3RP1903 3RP1903
5 mm
Figure 11-1: Mounting the basic units
5 mm
11-3
11.2.2
Mounting the current measurement modules You can attach these system components in the following manner: Current measurement module up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current measurement modules! For the current measurement modules up to 25 A you also require an additional 25 mm long spacer. Current measurement module up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw attachment. Current measurement modules up to 630 A screw attachment.
3UF7100-1AA00-00.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7101-1AA00-0 2.4 A up to 25 A Snap-on mounting 45 mm wide 55 mm wide 3UF7102-1AA00-0 10 A up to 100 A
Screw attachment 3RP1900-0B 25 mm spacer 3RP1900-0B
3UF7103-1AA00-0 10 A up to 100 A Snap-on mounting or screw attachment
3UF7103-1BA00-0 20 A up to 200 A Snap-on mounting or screw attachment
3UF7104-1BA00-0 63 A up to 630 A screw attachment
Figure 11-2: Mounting the current measurement modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.2.3
Mounting the operator panel The operator panel is designed to be installed in the front panel of motor control centers or in cabinet doors (for example). Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 Description Create a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or cabinet door (see diagram for dimensions). Place the operator panel in the cutout. Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel. Lock the operator panel in position by tightly screwing the four screws of the mounting bracket.
Table 11-1: Sequence for mounting an operator panel
Operator panel 4x
Mounting bracket
Cutout
90+0.5
Figure 11-3: Mounting the operator panel
30+0.5
Front panel Switching cabinet door etc.
11-5
11.3
11.3.1
Wiring
Detachable terminals for basic units and expansion modules Basic units and expansion modules have detachable terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to interchange the components!
Detachable terminals
Basic units
Expansion modules
D C
D C
A
A, C, D: coded
Figure 11-4: Detachable terminals
Attention The detachable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular position! Cables The cable cross-section is the same for all devices. The following table shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables for the detachable terminals:
Detachable terminals Screwdriver M3.5 Strip length 10 10 AWG Solid Stranded, with/without end sleeves Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 LB.IN Cable cross-section 1 x (0.5 to 4.0) mm 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm AWG 2 x 20 to 14
Table 11-2: Cable cross-sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
SIMOCODE pro
11-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Basic unit pin assignment The following table shows the pin assignment of the detachable terminals:
Pin Assignment
Upper terminals 1 2 3 4 5 T2 6 7 8 9 10 T1 Relay output 1 and 2 Relay output OUT1 Relay output OUT2 Digital input IN3 Digital input IN4 Thermistor connection (binary PTC) Relay output OUT3 Relay output OUT4 Internal 24 V DC Digital input IN1
DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT
1 OUT1 2 .2
3 4 IN3 IN45
T2
6 OUT3 7 24 V 8 9 IN1 IN210 T1
SIMOCODE pro
Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals A1 A2 A B SPE/PE Pin 1 supply voltage Pin 2 supply voltage PROFIBUS DP Pin A PROFIBUS DP Pin B Shielded/PE
A1 A2
B SPE/PE
Table 11-3: Detachable terminals pin assignment
Sequence for wiring the detachable terminals of basic units Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 Description Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals. If you want to use terminals A/B for PROFIBUS DP place the PROFIBUS DP , cable-shielding on the SPE/PE terminal. Attention! The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud rates up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible! Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Table 11-4: Wiring the detachable terminals of basic units
PROFIBUS DP 11-7
Digital input IN2
TEST/ RESET
Digital module pin assignment The following table shows the pin assignment of the detachable terminals:
Pin Assignment
Upper terminals 20 21 22 23 24 25 Relay output 1 and 2 Relay output OUT1 Relay output OUT2 Digital input IN1 Digital input IN2
23 IN1 IN224 25 20 OUT121 .2 22
Lower terminals 26 27 PE Digital input IN3 Digital input IN4 Shielding
READY
26 IN3 IN427 PE
Table 11-5: Detachable terminals pin assignment
Sequence for wiring the detachable terminals Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 Description Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals. Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
Table 11-6: Wiring the detachable terminals of digital modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.3.2
Current measurement with current measurement modules The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding current measurement module that should be chosen for current measurement: Push-through system up to 200 A. The 3 phases pass through the pushthrough openings. Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens contactors. The following table shows the various current measurement modules with the corresponding current measurement ranges:
Current measurement module 3UF7100-1AA00-0 0.3 A up to 3 A Push-through openings: 7.5 mm 3UF7101-1AA00-0 2.4 A up to 25 A Push-through openings: 7.5 mm 3UF7102-1AA00-0 10 A up to 100 A Push-through openings: 14 mm 3UF7103-1AA00-0 20 A up to 200 A Push-through openings: 25 mm 3UF7103-1BA00-0 20 A up to 200 A Pin cross-section: 16 to 95 mm, AWG 6 to 3/0 3UF7104-1BA00-0 63 A up to 630 A Pin cross-section: 50 to 240 mm, AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil
Table 11-7: Current measurement module with the corresponding current measurement range
Current measurement Push-through system
Rail connection system
11-9
11.4
11.4.1
System interfaces
General Please observe the following notes: SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the system interfaces. There are 4 lengths of connecting cable that can be used to join the system components. The system is always expanded from the basic unit. Basic units have 2 system interfaces: Bottom: For outgoing connection cables from BU1 to the current measurement module. Front: For outgoing connecting cables to an expansion module or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs. Current measurement modules have one system interface: Bottom or front incoming connecting cable from basic unit. Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front. Left: For incoming connecting cable from previous expansion module or basic unit BU2. Right: For outgoing connecting cables to an expansion module or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs. The operator panel has 2 system interfaces: Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs. Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from previous expansion module or basic unit. System interfaces that are not used are closed using the covering.
SIMOCODE pro
11-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Example The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro V:
Basic units Expansion modules
Incoming, from Expansion module Basic unit BU2
Outgoing, to Current measurement module
Outgoing, to Expansion module Operator panel
Outgoing, to Expansion module Operator panel
Current measurement Incoming, from Operator panel (OP) Module (IM) Previous expansion module
Basic unit Incoming, from Basic unit
SIMOCODE pro V
Current measurement module (IM)
Basic unit (BU2) Expansion module
Operator panel (OP)
Covering Figure 11-5: Example of system interfaces
UF-01130
11-11
UF-01130
11.4.2
Basic units, expansion modules and current measurement modules The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic units. Other system components can be joined to them using a connecting cable, e.g. digital module, current measurement module directly plugged into them, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules. System interfaces that are not used are closed using the system-interface covering.
Attention Only connect system interfaces when there is no voltage applied!
Basic units
Expansion modules
Current measurement modules
System interfaces Connecting cable
2 system interfaces Connecting cable System interface
Memory module, covering, addressing plug
System interface
Figure 11-6: Connecting system components to the system interface
SIMOCODE pro
11-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Sequence for connecting the system interface Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 Description Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place. For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interface on the bottom can only be used for the current measurement module! Use the covering to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 11-8: Connecting the system interfaces
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Catches
Color-coded
1 2 System interfaces on the front side and the bottom
Catches
Covering
Connecting cable
Figure 11-7: Method for connecting the system interfaces
Notes Attention For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be used for the current measurement module!
Attention Follow the color-coding on the connecting cable (see Figure)!
11-13
11.4.3
Operator panel The operator panel has two system interfaces: system interface on the rear. This is not normally accessible when an integrated operator panel is used since the connecting cable from the basic unit or expansion module is attached to it. system interface on the front. This is normally accessible when an integrated operator panel is used. Components are connected directly when required and then removed again afterwards. These could include: Memory modules Addressing plugs PC cable to connect a PC / programming device Covering (if a system interface is not being used).
Rear system interface Front system interface
Connecting cable
Figure 11-8: Connecting system components to the operator panel
e.g. Memory module
SIMOCODE pro
11-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Sequence for connecting the system interfaces Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 Description Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place. The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side. Use the covering to close system interfaces that are not in use.
Table 11-9: Connecting the system interface
Rear system interface
Front system interface
Catches
Connecting
1 1 2
Catches Color-coded Connecting cable
Figure 11-9: Method for connecting the system interfaces
Notes Attention Follow the color-coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!
11-15
11.4.4
PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit. Attention The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to terminals A/B!
Sequence for PROFIBUS DP connection Carry out the following steps:

Step 1 Description Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 11-10: Wiring the detachable terminals of digital modules
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
9-pole SUB-D plug
PROFIBUS DP interface 9-pole SUB-D socket PROFIBUS DP cable
Figure 11-10: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
SIMOCODE pro
11-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.5
Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP

The key data included in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and cables.
Specification
Profibus user organization (PUO) installation guidelines For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also follow the PROFIBUS DMP/ FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization. This contains important information about the cable arrangement and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks. Publisher: PROFIBUS User Organization e. V. Haid-und-Neu-Strae 7 76131 Karlsruhe, Germany Tel.: ++721 / 9658 590 Fax: ++721 / 9658 589 Internet: http://www.profibus.com Guidelines, order no. 2.111 Installation of bus termination modules The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily designed for use in MCC motor feeders. It provides a proper bus termination even for removed MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when no (SUB-D) standard plug can be used in the last device on a bus line. The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can also be connected to 220/ 230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can also be used for 24 V DC.
Figure 11-11: Bus termination module
11-17
SIMOCODE pro
11-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Commissioning and Servicing

In this chapter
12
In this chapter you will find e.g. information on how SIMOCODE pro is commissioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
commissioners technicians maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: general basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro e.g. from chapter 1 SIMOCODE ES software configuring the PROFIBUS DP address.
12-1
12.1
Notes
General information about commissioning and servicing
Warning Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Conditions The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and servicing: SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired the motor is switched off Notes on parameterizing You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
with the memory module - where parameters from a basic unit were already saved: the memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is on the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, then the basic unit is automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded into the basic unit by pressing the test/reset button. with the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface: The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the PC cable. with an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via PROFIBUS DP: For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
Possible cases for commissioning There are 2 possible cases for commissioning:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized and has the basic factory default settings: When connected to PROFIBUS DP the bus LED flashes green if a DP , master is connected. 2. SIMOCODE pro was already parameterized: the parameters were already loaded into the basic unit in advance. the parameters from a previous application are still present. Check if the parameters e.g. set current are correct for the new application. Change these correspondingly, if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
12-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.2
12.2.1
Commissioning
Sequence of steps Note the information in the previous chapter "General information about commissioning and servicing" on page 12-2. Carry out the following steps to commission SIMOCODE pro:
Step 1 Description Switch on the supply voltage. In an error-free state, the following LEDS should light up or flash green: Device (light up green) Bus if PROFIBUS DP is connected. (light up/flash) Continue with step 2. Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. You will find further information in chapter "Diagnostics via LED display" on page 12-5. Try to rectify the error. If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP set the , PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information on this in chapter "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" on page 12-4. Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the current parameterization e.g. with a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed. For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the PC cable. Attention! For basic unit 1, (SIMOCODE pro C) only use the system interface on the front! Start SIMOCODE ES.
Table 12-1: Commissioning the basic unit
Schematic
PC cable, Order number 3UF7940-0AA00-0
Figure 12-1: Schematic for commissioning the basic unit
12-3
12.2.2
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address First you have to set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. For this, there are the following options: with the addressing plug with SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 Description Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered. Example address 21: Put the 16+4+1 switches into the ON position . Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The Device LED lights up yellow. Press the test/reset button for a short period of time. The set address is accepted. The Device LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds. Pull the addressing plug out of the system interface.
2 3 4
Table 12-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Plug the PC cable into the system interface. Start SIMOCODE ES. Click on the menu Switchgear >Open online. Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface. Press OK to confirm. Open the dialog Device parameters >Bus parameters. Select the DP address. Save the data in the basic unit with Target system > Load in switchgear. The address is set.
Table 12-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
12-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.2.3
Diagnostics via LED display The basic units and the operating panel have 3 LEDs which display certain device states:
LED Device Status Device status Display Green Green flickering Yellow Description Device ready for use Internal error Memory module or addressing plug recognized, test/reset buttons control the memory module or addressing plug Memory module/ addressing plug read in; basic factory default settings configured (duration: 3 s) Memory module programmed (duration: 3 s) Faulty parameterization Corrective measures for errors Send back the basic unit
Yellow flashing
Yellow flickering Red
Parameterize anew and switch the control voltage off and on again Replace the basic unit! Reprogram/replace the memory module, replace the expansion module
Basic unit defective (also gen. fault on) Red flashing Memory module, addressing plug Expansion module defective (also gen. fault on flashing) supply voltage too low
Off
Check if the supply voltage is connected/turned on Connect the bus or check the bus parameters
Bus
Bus status
Off
Bus not connected or bus error Baud rate recognized/ communication with PC/ programming device Communication with PLC/DCS Error present; reset is saved Error present; no reset saved no error
Green flashing Green Gen. Fault Error status Red Red flashing Off
Table 12-4: Diagnostics via LED display
Rectify error, e.g. overload Rectify error, e.g. overload
12-5
12.3
12.3.1
Servicing
Preventive maintenance Preventive maintenance is an important step in avoiding faults and unforeseen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance in order to e.g. prevent halts in production due to plant downtimes. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components always work properly.
Reading out the statistics data SIMOCODE pro makes statistics data available, which you e.g. can read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target system > Service data/statistics data. For example, by specifying Motor operating hours and Number of starts you can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.
Figure 12-2: Reading out statistic data
SIMOCODE pro
12-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.3.2
Saving the parameters Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES file. This applies especially if you replace a basic unit or if you want to transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit in the memory module Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 Description Plug the PC memory module into the system interface. The Device LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the Test/ reset button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters are saved in the memory module. After a successful data transfer, the Device LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 12-5: Saving the parameters in the memory module.
Saving parameters from the basic unit in a SIMOCODE ES file Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 Description Plug the PC cable into the system interface. Start SIMOCODE ES. Open the menu Target system > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded into the main memory from the basic unit. Click on the menu Switchgear >Save copy as .... The parameters from the main memory are saved in a SIMOCODE ES file.
Table 12-6: Saving parameters in a SIMOCODE ES file
12-7
Saving parameters from the memory module in the basic unit Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 Description Plug the memory module into the system interface. The Device LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the test/reset button for a short period of time. The parameters are saved in the basic unit. After a successful data transfer, the Device LED lights up yellow for approx. 3 seconds. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 12-7: Saving parameters from the memory module in the basic unit
Attention When the memory module is plugged in, the parameters are transferred from the memory module to the basic unit.
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 Description Plug the PC cable into the system interface. Start SIMOCODE ES. Click on the menu Switchgear>Open. The parameters from the SIMOCODE ES file are saved in the main memory. Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters are loaded from the main memory into the basic unit.
Table 12-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
12-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.3.3
Replace SIMOCODE pro components
Replacing a basic unit Carry out the following steps:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Description Save the parameters. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving the parameters" on page 12-7. Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit. If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface. Remove the detachable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring. Demount the basic unit. Remove the detachable terminals of the new basic unit. Mount the new basic unit. Plug in the wired detachable terminals. Plug the connecting cable into the system interface. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. Save the parameters in the basic unit. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving the parameters" on page 12-7. Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 12-9: Replacing a basic unit
Replacing expansion units Carry out the following steps:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Description Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit. If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface. Remove the detachable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring. Demount the expansion module. Remove the detachable terminals of the new expansion unit. Mount the new expansion module. Plug in the wired detachable terminals. Plug the connecting cable into the system interface. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 12-10: Replacing a basic unit
12-9
12.3.4
Configuring the basic factory default setting With the basic factory default settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.
Configuring the basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Description Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit. Press the test/reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The Device LED lights up yellow. Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds. Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds. Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds. Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds. Basic factory default setting is configured.
Table 12-11: Configuring basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device
Notes Attention If one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit reverts to normal operation.
Attention This function is always active, independent of the test/reset buttons lokked parameter. Configuring the basic factory default settings with the SIMOCODE ES software Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface with PC/programming device and started with SIMOCODE ES. Carry out the following steps:
Step 1 2 3 4 Description Click on the menu Switchgear >Open online. In the menu, select Target system > Command > Basic factory setting. Press Yes to confirm. Basic factory default settings are configured.
Table 12-12: Configuring the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
12-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working with SIMOCODE pro. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
configurators.
Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
A-1
A-2
Lamp control Control station Status signal ON<< Left Left OFF Right Star Delta Right Left contactor contactor network network contactor contactor Fast Slow Fast Star contactor Fast Star contactor Left Slow Left Slow Reset ON command Reset ON command Left Fast Left Fast Left Fast Left Fast OFF OFF ON Delta Network Star contactor contactor contactor OFF ON Right OFF ON ON pulse OFF pulse OFF ON Left OFF Right Right Left Left OFF Right OFF ON ON OFF ON Active ON< OFF ON> ON>> QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> Contactor control QLE<< (ON<<) QLE< (ON<) QLA (OFF) QLE> (ON>) QLE>> (ON>>) OFF Slow Fast OFF Slow Fast Left Fast Left Fast OFF ON ON network contactor Closed Stop Open Open Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Stop Open Open Closed Closed Open Open Left Slow OFF Right Slow Right Fast Right Fast Right Slow OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow Left Slow OFF Right Slow Right Fast Right Fast Right Slow Left Slow Left Slow Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed OFF Right Slow OFF OFF Slow Right Slow Closed Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop OFF Open Open Open Open Open Open ON Right Fast Fast Right Fast -
A.1
Tables
Specification/ Control function
Overload 1),2)
Direct starter 1),2)
Reversing starter 1),2)
Circuit breaker 1),2)
Star-delta starter 2)
Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation 2)
Dahlander 2)
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation 2)
Pole-changing switch 2)
Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation 2)
Valve 2)
Slider 1 2)
Slider 2 2)
Slider 3 2)
Slider 4 2)
Slider 5 2)
Soft starter 2)
Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status signals/messages for the control functions
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status signals/messages for the control functions
Left OFF Right Right Left network network contactor contactor Left OFF Right -
Soft reversing starter2)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
SIMOCODE pro
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C 2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
Tables
A.2
Abbreviations and Specifications

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviations
Abbreviation BU1 BU2 IM UM DM1 DM2 OP AM EM TM Th CF Cycl. Acycl.

Table A-2: Abbreviations
Meaning Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C) Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro V) Current measurement module Current/voltage measurement modules Digital module 1 Digital module 2 Operator panel Analog module Earth-fault module Temperature module Thermistor Control function Cyclic Acyclic
Note
Available from mid 2005
Available from mid 2005 Available from mid 2005 Available from mid 2005
Specifications The following specifications apply in the tables:

Example
Specification Reserved Cos Reserved Max. current I max Grayed entries only available from the middle of 2005
Type Byte[4] Byte Byte[5] Word
Range 0 .. 100 0 .. 65535
Unit 1% 1% / Ie
Info BU2 BU1 BU2
Entries in italics Entry relevant for basic not relevant (reserved) unit 1 and basic unit 2 and, when writing, should be filled with 0
SIMOCODE III GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
A-3
Tables
A.3
Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (Nr.) of the sockets (digital). You only need these assignment numbers if, in a user program, you fill data records and write these back (for example).
Nr. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Static level
Specification
Specification Not connected Fixed level value 0 Fixed level value 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Information BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
Basic unit BU
BU - test/reset button BU - input 1 BU - input 2 BU - input 3 BU - input 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
Digital expansion modules DM
DM1 - input 1 DM1 - input 2 DM1 - input 3 DM1 - input 4 DM2 - input 1 DM2 - input 2 DM2 - input 3 DM2 - input 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
DM1 DM1 DM1 DM1 DM2 DM2 DM2 DM2
Operator panel OP
OP - test/reset button OP - button 1 OP - button 2 OP - button 3 OP - button 4 Reserved
OP OP OP OP OP
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital
SIMOCODE pro
A-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
Nr. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
Specification Reserved Reserved DPV1/RS-232 interface (Acyclic data)
Specification
Information
Acyclic control data - bit 0.0 Acyclic control data - bit 0.1 Acyclic control data - bit 0.2 Acyclic control data - bit 0.3 Acyclic control data - bit 0.4 Acyclic control data - bit 0.5 Acyclic control data - bit 0.6 Acyclic control data - bit 0.7 Acyclic control data - bit 1.0 Acyclic control data - bit 1.1 Acyclic control data - bit 1.2 Acyclic control data - bit 1.3 Acyclic control data - bit 1.4 Acyclic control data - bit 1.5 Acyclic control data - bit 1.6 Acyclic control data - bit 1.7
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
PLC/DCS interface PLC [DPV0] (cyclic data)
Cyclic control data - bit 0.0 Cyclic control data - bit 0.1 Cyclic control data - bit 0.2 Cyclic control data - bit 0.3 Cyclic control data - bit 0.4 Cyclic control data - bit 0.5 Cyclic control data - bit 0.6 Cyclic control data - bit 0.7 Cyclic control data - bit 1.0 Cyclic control data - bit 1.1 Cyclic control data - bit 1.2 Cyclic control data - bit 1.3 Cyclic control data - bit 1.4 Cyclic control data - bit 1.5 Cyclic control data - bit 1.6 Cyclic control data - bit 1.7
Enabled control command
Enabled control command ON<< Enabled control command ON< Enabled control command OFF Enabled control command ON> Enabled control command ON>> Reserved Reserved Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
A-5
Tables
Nr. 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
Specification Contactor controls
Specification Contactor control 1 QE1 Contactor control 2 QE2 Contactor control 3 QE3 Contactor control 4 QE4 Contactor control 5 QE5 Reserved Reserved Reserved
Information
dependent of the control function
Lamp controls
Display - QLE<< (ON<<) Display - QLE< (ON<) Display - QLA (OFF) Display - QLE> (ON>) Display - QLE>> (ON>>) Display - QLS (fault) Reserved Reserved BU1/BU2 dependent of the control function
Status signals - general
Status - general fault Status - general warning Status - device Status - bus Status - PLC/DCS Status - current flows Reserved Reserved
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 Current measurement
Status signals - controlling
Status - ON<< Status - ON< Status - OFF Status - ON> Status - ON>> Status - start active Status - interlocking time active BU1/BU2 all reversing starters and sliders dependent of the control function
Status - switching interval active Star-delta, Dahlander, pole-changing switches Status - runs in open direction Status - runs in closed direction Status - FC Status - FO Status - TC Status - TO Status - cold starting (TPF) Status - OPO
112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
dependent of the control function
BU1/BU2 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
Nr. 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153
Specification
Specification
Information
Status - automatic mode of ope- BU1/BU2 ration Status signals - protection Status - emergency start executed Current measurement
Status - cooling down time active Current measurement Status - pause time active Status signals - miscellaneous Status - device test active Status - phase sequence 1-2-3 Status - phase sequence 3-2-1 Reserved Signals - protection Signal - overload operation Signal - asymmetry Signal - overload Signal - overload + phase failure Signal - internal earth fault Signal - external earth fault Reserved Signal - thermistor overload Signal - thermistor short circuit Signal - thermistor wire break Signal - TM warning T> Signal - TM tripping T> Signal - TM sensor error Signal - TM out of range Reserved Reserved Signals - level monitoring Signal - warning I> Signal - warning I< Signal - warning P> Signal - warning P< Signal - warning cos< Signal - warning U< Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA> Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA< Signal - tripping I> Signal - tripping I<
Current measurement BU1/BU2 UM UM Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement EM Th Th Th TM TM TM TM
Current measurement Current measurement UM UM UM UM AM AM Current measurement Current measurement
A-7
Tables
Nr. 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193
Specification
Specification Signal - tripping P> Signal - tripping P< Signal - tripping cos< Signal - tripping U< Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA> Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA< Signal - blocking Reserved Reserved Signal - no start permitted Signal - number of starts > Signal - another start permitted Signal - stopped time > Signal - limit value 1 Signal - limit value 2 Signal - limit value 3 Signal - limit value 4 UM UM UM UM AM AM
Information
Current measurement
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2
Signal - motor operating hours > BU1/BU2
Signals - miscellaneous
Signal - external fault 1 Signal - external fault 2 Signal - external fault 3 Signal - external fault 4 Signal - external fault 5 Signal - external fault 6 Reserved Reserved Signal - analog module wire break Reserved Reserved Reserved
AM
Signals - timestamp function
Signal - timestamp function active+ok Reserved Reserved Reserved
BU2
Signals - system interface
Signal - configured operator panel is missing Reserved Reserved Reserved
BU1/BU2
Faults - general
Fault - HW fault basic unit Fault - module fault
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
Nr. 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237
Specification
Specification Fault - temp components Fault - configuration fault Fault - parameterization Fault - bus Fault - PLC/DCS Reserved
Information BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
Faults - controlling
Fault - runtime ON Fault - runtime OFF Fault - F ON Fault - F OFF Fault - blocking slider Fault - double 0 Fault - double 1 Fault - end position Fault - antivalence Fault - cold starting (TPF) error Fault - UVO error Fault - OPO error Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Silder Valve/silder Valve/silder Valve/silder Slider BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 not for overload relay
Freely programmable elements
Truth table 1 3I/1O output Truth table 2 3I/1O output Truth table 3 3I/1O output Truth table 4 3I/1O output Truth table 5 3I/1O output Truth table 6 3I/1O output Truth table 7 2I/1O output Truth table 8 2I/1O output Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timer 1 output Timer 2 output Timer 3 output Timer 4 output Counter 1 output Counter 2 output
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
A-9
Tables
Nr. 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Specification
Specification Counter 3 output Counter 4 output Signal conditioning 1 output Signal conditioning 2 output Signal conditioning 3 output Signal conditioning 4 output Non-volatile element 1 output Non-volatile element 2 output Non-volatile element 3 output Non-volatile element 4 output Flashing 1 output Flashing 2 output Flashing 3 output Flickering 1 output Flickering 2 output Flickering 3 output Reserved Reserved
Information BU2 BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
A.4
Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (Nr.) of the sockets (analog). You only need these assignment numbers if, in a user program, you fill data records and write these back (for example). All inputs for analog data can only process values of type word (2 bytes). In order to be also able to process values of type byte the following app, lies: the byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0
Nr. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Not connected Reserved Reserved Reserved
Specification
Unit
Information BU1/BU2
Timer 1 - actual value Timer 2 - actual value Timer 3 - actual value Timer 4 - actual value Timer 1 - actual value Timer 2 - actual value Timer 3 - actual value Timer 4 - actual value Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Max. current I_max Current I_L1 Current I_L2 Current I_L3 Phase asymmetry Reserved Reserved Reserved Voltage U_L1 Voltage U_L2 Voltage U_L3 Cos phi Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Heating up of the motor model Time to trip
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog
100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2 BU2 BU2
1%/Ie 1%/Ie 1%/Ie 1%/Ie 1%
Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement
1V 1V 1V 1%
UM UM UM UM
Current measurement 100 ms Current measurement
A-11
Tables
Nr. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 .. 69 70 71 72 73 75 .. 255 Recovery time
Specification 100 ms 1%/Ie 1K 1K 1K 1K 1h Last tripping current TM - Temperature TM - Temperature 1 TM - Temperature 2 TM - Temperature 3 Permitted starts - actual value Stopped time Reserved Reserved AM - input TM - temperature Reserved Reserved Acyclic control data - analog value Cyclic control data - analog value Reserved Reserved Motor operating hours - H-word Motor operating hours - L-word Int. motor operating hours - H-word Int. motor operating hours - L-word Device operating hours - H-word Device operating hours - L-word Number of starts - H-word Number of starts - L-word Int. number of starts right - H-word Int. number of starts right - L-word Int. number of starts left - H-word Int. number of starts left - L-word Reserved Reserved Reserved Real power - H-word Real power - L-word Apparent power - H-word Apparent power - L-word Reserved Reserved Reserved
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (cont.)
Unit
Information Current measurement Current measurement TM TM TM TM BU1/BU2 BU1/BU2
See 1) 1K
AM TM
BU1/BU2 BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2 1s 1s 1s BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
BU2 1W 1VA BU2 BU2 BU2
1) S7 format:
0/4mA=0 20mA=27648
SIMOCODE pro
A-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
A.5
Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis

This table contains the detailled signals of the slave diagnosis for the status signals and the prozess alarm. This information is also contained in the data record 92.
Byte.Bit 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6.0 6.1 Faults level monitoring Faults - protection Faults controlling
Status signal Fault - Ausfhrung Ein-Befehl Fault - Ausfhrung Aus-Befehl Fault - F Ein Fault - F Aus Fault - blocked slider Fault - double 0 Fault - double 1 Fault - Endlage Fault - antivalence Fault - cold starting (TPF)-error Fault - UVO error Fault - UVO error reserved reserved Fault - asymmetriy Fault - overload Fault - overload + phase failure Fault - Int. earth fault Fault - Ext. earth fault reserved Fault - thermistor overload Fault - thermistor short circuit Fault - Thermistor wire break reserved Fault - TM Auslsung T> Fault - TM Sensorfehler Fault - TM Out of range reserved Fault - tripping I> Fault - tripping I< Fault - tripping P> Fault - trippingP< Fault - tripping cos< Fault - tripping U< Fault - tripping 0/4-20mA> Fault - tripping0/4-20mA< Fault - blocking reserved
Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis
Info
slider slider slider slider slider BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement EM Th Th Th TM TM TM Current measurement Current measurement UM UM UM UM AM AM Current measurement
A-13
Tables
Byte.Bit 6.4 6.5 7.0 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 8.0 8.1 8.2 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 12.0 12.1 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 Warnings level monitoring Warnings - protection Faults miscellaneous
Status signal Fault - number of starts> reserved Fault - ext. fault 1 Fault - ext. fault 2 Fault - ext. fault 3 Fault - ext. fault 4 Fault - ext. fault 5 Fault - ext. fault 6 reserved reserved Fault - analogue module wire break Fault - test shutdown reserved Warning - overload protection Warning - asymmetry Warning - overload Warning - overload+ phase failure Warning - internal earth fault Warning - external earth fault reserved Warning - thermistor overload Warning - thermistor short circuit Warning - thermistor wire break Warning - TM warnung T> reserved Warning - TM sensor error Warning - TM out of range reserved Warning - warning I> Warning - warning I< Warning - warning P> Warning - warning P< Warning - warning cos< Warning - warning U< Warning - warning 0/4-20mA> Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA< Warning - Blocking reserved Warning - no start permitted Warning - number of starts > Warning - another start permitted Warning - motor operation hours > Warning - stopped time t >
Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis (cont.)
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
AM BU1 BU2 Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement EM Th Th Th TM TM TM Current measurement Current measurement UM UM UM UM AM AM Current measurement BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
Byte.Bit 13.0 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 14.0 14.1 15.0 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 16.0 16.1 Signals parameterization Status signals - controlling Status signals - protection Warnings miscellaneous
Status signal Warning - ext. fault 1 Warning - ext. fault 2 Warning - ext. fault 3 Warning - ext. fault 4 Warning - ext. fault 5 Warning - ext. fault 6 reserved reserved Warnung - analog module wire break reserved reserved Status - emergency start executed Status - cooling down time active reserved reserved reserved Status - cold starting (TPF) reserved Signal - start-up parameter block active Signal Parameter change not permitted in the current operating state BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 AM BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
Info
16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7
Signal - device does not support the BU1 BU2 required functions Signal - parameter faulty Signal - wrong password reserved reserved reserved
Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis (cont.)
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
A-15
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Data Formats and Data Records

In this chapter In this chapter you will find information about the data records of SIMOCODE pro. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
configurators PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: good knowledge about writing and reading data records
good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
Data records - overview

Data record number 67 69 92 94 95 130 131 132 133 139 160 165 202 203 224 Description Process image of the outputs Process image of the inputs Device diagnostics (faults, warnings, signals) Measured values Service/statistics data Base device parameter 1 (BU1 BU2) Base device parameter 2 (BU1 BU2) Extended device parameter 1 (BU2) Extended device parameter 2 (BU2) Labeling Communication parameters Designation Acyclic control data Acyclic signaling data Password protection Read/write Read Read Read Read Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read/write Read Write
B-1
B.1
Handling data records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data records.
B.1.1
Writing/reading data records
Access to data records via slot and index

Slot: access via slot 1 Index: data record number
Writing/reading data records with STEP7 You can access the data records from the user program. Writing data records: S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 WR_REC or SFC 58 S7 master: by calling SFC 58 Reading data records: S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 RD_REC or SFC 59 S7 master: by calling SFC 59 Further information You will find further information on the SFBs in the System software for S7-300/400, system and standard functions reference manual in the STEP7 online help. Byte arrangements When data which is longer than one byte is saved, then the bytes are arranged as follows (big endian):
Byte arrangements Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 0 Byte 1 Data type
High byte High word Low byte High byte Low word Low byte High byte Word Low byte Byte 0 Byte Byte 1 Double word (D-word)
Figure B-1: Byte arrangement in the big endian format
SIMOCODE pro
B-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.1.2
Abbreviations The fallowing abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation BU1 BU2 IM UM DM1 DM2 OP AM EM TM Th CF Cycl. Acycl.

Table B-1: Abbreviations
Meaning Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C) Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro V) Current measurement module Current/voltage measurement modules Digital module 1 Digital module 2 Operator panel Analog module Earth-fault module Temperature module Thermistor Control function Cyclic Acyclic
Note
Available from mid 2005
Available from mid 2005 Available from mid 2005 Available from mid 2005
B.1.3
Specifications The following specifications apply in the tables:

Example Specification Reserved Cos Reserved max. current I max Type Byte[4] Byte Byte[5] Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1 BU2 0 .. 100 1% BU2 Range Unit Info
Grayed entries only available from mid 2005
Entries in italics are not relevant (reserved) and, when writing, should be filled with 0
Entry is relevant for basic unit 1 and basic unit 2
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.
B-3
B.2
Data record 67 - process image of the outputs

Byte.Bit Specification Presetting (see also parameter) Type Info
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 to 3.7
Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.1 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.2 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.3 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.4 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.5 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.6 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.7 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.0 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.1 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.2 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.3 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.4 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.5 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.6 Cyclic controlling - bit 1.7 Cyclic controlling analog value
Control station Bit PLC/DCS [DP] ON< Control station PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Bit
Control station Bit PLC/DCS [DP] ON> Test 1 Motor protection Emergency start Mode selector S1 Reset 1 Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Word BU2
BU1 BU2
Table B-2: Data record 67 - process image of the outputs
Base types (cyclic control data PLC --> SIMOCODE pro)
Specification Base type 1 (available from mid 2005)
Length 4 bytes of control data
Specification Cyclic controlling bits 0.0 to 1.7 Cyclic controlling analog value
Info BU2
Base type 2
2 bytes of control data
Cyclic controlling bits 0.0 to 1.7
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.3
Data record 69 - process image of the inputs

Byte.Bit Specification Presetting (see also parameter) Status - ON< Status - OFF Status - ON> Signal overload operation Status interlocking time active Status automatic mode of operation Status general fault Status general warning Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Type Info
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.1 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.4
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0.5
Cyclic signaling - bit 0.5
Bit BU1 BU2
0.6 0.7 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
Cyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.7 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.1 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.2 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.3 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.4 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.5 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.6 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.7 PLC/DCS analog input 1 PLC/DCS analog input 2 PLC/DCS analog input 3 PLC/DCS analog input 4
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Word Word Word
Max. current I_max Word BU2 BU2 BU2
Table B-3: Data record 69 - process image of the inputs
Base types (cyclic signaling data SIMOCODE pro --> PLC)

Specification Base type 1 (available from mid 2005) Length 10 bytes of signaling data Specification Cyclic signaling bits 0.0 to 1.7 Cyclic signaling analog inputs 1 to 4 Base type 2 4 bytes of signaling Cyclic signaling data bits 0.0 to 1.7 Cyclic signaling analog input 1 BU1 BU2 Info BU2
B-5
B.4
Data record 92 - device diagnostics
Byte.Bit 0.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Status signals controlling Status signals general
Specification Reserved Status general fault Status general warning Status - device Status - bus Status - PLC/DCS Status - motor current flowing Reserved Status - ON<< Status - ON< Status - OFF Status - ON> Status - ON>> Status - start active Status interlocking time active Status pause time active Status - runs in open direction Status - runs in closed direction Status - FC Status - FO Status - TC Status - TO Status cold starting (TPF) Status - OPO Status - automatic mode of operation Status signals protection Status - emergency start executed Status cooling down time active Status - pause time active
Info
DP Diagn.*
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 Current measurement
Depending on the CF
BU1 BU2 all reversing starters and sliders Star-delta, Dahlander, pole-changing switches
3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3
Depending on the CF
BU1 BU2 BU2 BU1 BU2 Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement
M M
Table B-4: Data record 92 - diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
B-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 7.0 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 Signals - level monitoring Signals - protection Status signals miscellaneous
Specification Status device test active Status phase sequence 1-2-3 Status phase sequence 3-2-1 Reserved Signal overload operation Signal asymmetry Signal - overload Signal - overload + phase failure Signal internal earth fault Signal external earth fault Res. signal warning ext. EF Signal thermistor overload Signal - thermistor short circuit Signal - thermistor wire break Signal - TM warning T> Signal - TM tripping T> Signal - TM sensor error Signal - TM Out of range Reserved Signal - warning I> Signal - warning I< Signal warning P> Signal warning P< Signal warning cos< Signal warning U< Signal warning 0/4-20mA>
Info BU1 BU2 UM UM
DP Diagn.*
Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement EM EM Th Th Th TM TM TM TM Current measurement
Current measurement UM UM UM UM AM
Table B-4: Data record 92 - diagnostics (cont.)
B-7
Byte.Bit 7.7 8.0 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 9.0 9.1 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5
Specification Signal warning 0/4-20 mA< Signal tripping I> Signal tripping I< Signal tripping P> Signal tripping P< Signal tripping cos< Signal tripping U< Signal tripping 0/4-20 mA> Signal tripping 0/4-20 mA< Signal - blocking Reserved UM UM UM UM AM AM AM
Info
DP Diagn.*
Current measurement
Current measurement
Signal - not start permitted BU1 BU2 Signal - number of starts > BU1 BU2 Signal another start permitted Signal - motor operating hours > Signal stopped time > Signal - limit value 1 Signal - limit value 2 Signal - limit value 3 Signal - limit value 4 Signals - miscella- Signal - external fault 1 neous Signal - external fault 2 Signal - external fault 3 Signal - external fault 4 Signal - external fault 5 Signal - external fault 6 Reserved Reserved Signal analog module wire break Reserved AM BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 12.0
Specification Signals timestamp function Signals system interface Signal - timestamp function active+ok Reserved BU2
Info
DP Diagn.*
12.1 12.4 12.5 12.6 13.0 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.7 14.0 14.1 Signals - addressing plug
Signals - configured opera- BU1 BU2 tor panel is missing Signal - module not supported Reserved BU1 BU2
Signals - memory Signal - memory module module read in Signal - memory module programmed Signal - memory module deleted Reserved Signal - addressing plug read in
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2 M M
Signals - parame- Signal - start-up parameter BU1 BU2 terization block active Signal BU1 BU2 parameter change not permitted in the current operating state Signal device does not support the required functions Signal parameter faulty Signal wrong password Signal password protection active Signal basic factory default settings Signal parameterization active Signal - prm error number (bytes) ** Reserved Warnings - protection Warning overload operation Warning asymmetry Warning - overload Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement BU1 BU2
14.2
14.3 14.4 14.5
M M
14.6
BU1 BU2
14.7 15.0 16.0 17.0 17.1 17.2
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
W W W
B-9
Byte.Bit 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 18.0 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 19.0 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 20.0 20.1 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 Warnings level monitoring
Specification Warning - overload + phase failure Warning internal earth fault Warning external earth fault Reserved Warning thermistor overload Th
Info Current measurement Current measurement EM
DP Diagn.* W W W
W W W W
Warning - thermistor short Th circuit Warning - thermistor wire break Warning TM warning T> Reserved Warning TM sensor error Warning TM out of range Reserved Warning Warning I> Warning Warning I< Warning Warning P> Warning Warning P< Warning warning cos< Warning Warning U< Warning warning 0/4-20 mA> Warning warning 0/4-20 mA< Warning blocking Reserved Warning number of starts > Warning another start permitted BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 Current measurement Current measurement UM UM UM UM AM AM Current measurement TM TM Th TM
W W
W W W W W W W W W
W W W W
Warning - motor operating BU1 BU2 hours > Signal stopped time > BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 21.0 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.7 22.0 22.1 23.0 23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 24.0 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.6 24.7 25.0 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 26.0 26.1 26.2 26.3 Faults - protection Faults - controlling Faults - general Warnings - miscellaneous
Specification Warning - ext. fault 1 Warning - ext. fault 2 Warning - ext. fault 3 Warning - ext. fault 4 Warning - ext. fault 5 Warning - ext. fault 6 Reserved Reserved Warning - analog module wire break Reserved Fault - HW fault basic unit Fault - module fault Fault - temp components (e.g. memory module) Fault - configuration fault Fault parameterization Fault - bus Fault - PLC/DCS Reserved Fault - runtime ON Fault runtime OFF Fault - F ON Fault - F OFF Fault blocked slider Fault - double 0 Fault - double 1 Fault - end position Fault - antivalence Fault - cold starting (TPF) error Fault - UVO error Fault - OPO error Reserved Reserved Fault - asymmetry Fault - overload Fault - overload + phase failure BU2
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
DP Diagn.* W W W W W W
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement CF = slider CF = slider CF = slider CF = slider CF = slider BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
F9 F9 F9 F16 F16
FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU
Current measurement Current measurement Current measurement
FAU FAU FAU
B-11
Byte.Bit 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 27.0 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 28.0 28.1 28.2 28.3 28.4 28.5 28.6 28.7 29.0 29.1 29.4 29.5 Faults level monitoring
Specification Fault internal earth fault Fault external earth fault Reserved Fault thermistor overload Th
Info Current measurement EM
DP Diagn.* FAU FAU
FAU FAU FAU
Fault - thermistor short cir- Th cuit Fault - thermistor wire break Reserved Fault - TM tripping T> Fault - TM sensor fault Fault - TM out of range Reserved Fault - tripping I> Fault - tripping I< Fault tripping P> Fault tripping P< Fault tripping cos< Fault tripping U< Fault tripping 0/4-20 mA> Fault tripping 0/4-20 mA< Fault - blocking Reserved Fault - number of starts > Reserved BU1 BU2 Current measurement Current measurement UM UM UM UM AM AM Current measurement TM TM TM Th
FAU FAU FAU
FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU
FAU
SIMOCODE pro
B-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 30.0 30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 31.0 31.1 31.2
Specification Faults - miscellaneous Fault - fault 1 Fault - fault 2 Fault - fault 3 Fault - fault 4 Fault - fault 5 Fault - ext. fault 6 Reserved Reserved Fault analog module wire break Fault test shutdown Reserved AM
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
DP Diagn.* FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU FAU
FAU FAU
BU1 BU2
*)
The DP-Diagn. column contains the bits which are additionally available in the dia gnostics about PROFIBUS DP: F: Fault S: Signal W: Warning F9, F16: Error types
**)
Signal - prm error number (bytes): If a parameterization is not possible, then the number of the parameter group which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the parameter groups in the data records 130 to 133. Example parameter group Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 12.0 15.6 description (Prm group) coordination device configuration (see above) (12) Bit parameter (16) Ext. fault 3 effectiveness ... ... parameter group 12 parameter group 16 ...
B-13
B.5
Data record 94 - measured values

Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 26.0 28.0 30.0 32.0 34.0 36.0 38.0 40.0 42.0 44.0 46.0 48.0 52.0 56.0 60.0 Specification Reserved Heating up of the motor model Phase asymmetry Cos Reserved Max. current I max Current I L1 Current I L2 Current I L3 Last tripping current Time to trip Recovery time Voltage UL1 Voltage UL2 Voltage UL3 AM - Output AM - Input 1 AM - Input2 Reserved TM - Temperature TM - Temperature 1 TM - Temperature 2 TM - Temperature 3 Reserved Real power Apparent power Reserved Type Byte[4] Byte Byte Byte Byte[5] Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Byte[4] D-word D-word Byte[14] Range 0 .. 255 0 .. 100 0 .. 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. .. .. .. .. 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 Unit See 2) 1% 1% 1% 1% 1% 1% 1% / / / / / Ie Ie Ie Ie Ie Info Current measurement Current measurement UM Current Current Current Current Current measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement
.. 65535 .. 65535 .. 65535 .. 65535 .. 65535 .. 27648 .. 27648 .. 27648
100 ms 100 ms 1V 1V 1V siehe1)
Current measurement Current measurement UM UM UM AM AM AM
0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535
1 K see3) TM 1 K see3) TM 1 K see3) TM 1 K see3) TM
0 .. 1W 0xFFFFFFFF 0 .. 1 VA 0xFFFFFFFF
UM UM
Table B-5: Data record 94 - measured values
1) 2)
3)
S7 format: 0/4mA = 0 20mA = 27648 Representaion heating up the motor model: Value always refers to symmetrical tripping level, Representation in 2% steps in Bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%), Bit 7 shows asymmetry (fixed level 50%). Representation in Kelvin.
SIMOCODE pro
B-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.6
Data record 95 - Service/statistics data

Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.
Writing the service/statistics data
Additional abbreviations r/w: r:

Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 26.0 28.0 30.0 32.0 40.0 44.0 48.0 52.0 56.0 60.0 64.0
value can be written/ changed value can only be read

Specification Reserved Permitted starts - actual value Reserved Number of parameterizations Number of overload trippings Internal number overload trippings Stopped time Timer 1 - actual value Timer 2 - actual value Timer 3 - actual value Timer 4 - actual value Timer 1 - actual value Timer 2 - actual value Timer 3 - actual value Timer 4 - actual value Reserved Motor operating hours Int. motor operating hours Device operating hours Number of starts Internal number of starts right Internal number of starts left Reserved Type Byte[4] Byte Byte Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Byte D-word D-word D-word D-word D-word D-word Byte[12] 0 0 .. 255 r/w BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 Range Unit Info
0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1s 1s 1s 1h
r r/w r r/w r r r r r r r r r/w r r r/w r r
Table B-6: Data record 95 - diagnostics - statistics data
B-15
B.7
Data record 130 - base device parameter 1
Device configuration
Byte.Bit 0.0 1.0 1.1 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Device configuration Device class Thermistor (Th) Reserved Operator panel (OP) Analog module (AM) Temperature module (TM) Earth-fault modules (EM) Digital module 1 (DM1) Type Range Byte Bit Bit[7] Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit[2] 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module 1 = monostable 2 = bistable BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 5, 9 0, 1 5 = BU1 9 = BU2 1 = active; thermistor in the BU Note Info BU1 BU2 BU2 BU1 BU2
2.6 3.0 4.0
Digital module 2 (DM2) Reserved Current measurement module (IM)
Bit[2] Bit[8] Bit[7]
0 .. 2 0 .. 5 0 = no current measurement 1 = 0.3 .. 3 A 2 = 2.4 .. 25 A 3 = 10 .. 100 A 4 = 20 .. 200 A 5 = 63 .. 630 A
BU2 BU1 BU2
4.7 5.0 6.0
Voltage measurement (UM) Bit Reserved Control function (CF)
0, 1 0x00 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x20 0x21 0x00 = overload 0x10 = direct starter 0x11 = reversing starter 0x12 =linked switchgear 0x20 = star-delta starter 0x21 = star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation 0x30 = Dahlander 0x31 = Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation 0x40 = pole-changing switch 0x41 = pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation 0x50 = valve 0x60 =slider 1 0x61 =slider 2 0x62 =slider 3 0x63 =slider 4 0x64 =slider 5 0x70 =soft starter 0x71 =soft reversing starter
BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2
0x30 0x31 0x40 0x41
BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
0x50 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x70 0x71 7.0 Reserved
Table B-7: Device configuration
BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
Bit[8]
SIMOCODE pro
B-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Base device parameter 1

Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 12.0 12.0 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 13.0 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 14.0 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 15.0 15.1 15.2 15.3 Specification Coordination Device configuration (see above) (12) Bit parameter (16) No configuration fault due to OP Start-up parameter block active Test/reset buttons blocked Bus and PLC/DCS - reset Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Diagnostics for process signals Diagnostics for process warnings Diagnostics for process faults Diagnostics for device faults Reserved Reserved Bus monitoring Monitoring PLC/DCS Overload protection - type of load Overload protection - reset Reserved Save switching command Non-maintained command mode Cold starting level (TPF) Load type Reserved External fault 1 - type External fault 2 - type External fault 3 - type External fault 4 - type Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact 0 = motor, 1 = ohmic load CF<>0x00 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 0 = 3-phase 1 = 1-phase 0 = manual, 1 = automatic BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 0 = manual, 1 = automatic BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 Type Byte[4] Byte[8] BU1 BU2 Range Unit Default Note Info
Table B-8: Data record 130 - base device parameter 1
B-17
Byte.Bit 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 16.0 16.0 16.2 16.4 16.6 17.0 17.2 17.4 17.6 18.0 18.2 18.4 18.6 19.0
Specification External fault 1 effectiveness External fault 2 effectiveness External fault 3 effectiveness External fault 4 effectiveness Bit[2] parameters (20) Thermistor - overload response Thermistor - response to sensor error
Type Bit Bit Bit Bit
Range 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1
Unit
Default 0 0 0 0
Note 0 = always, 1 = only motor ON
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
Bit[2] Bit[2]
1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2
3 2 0 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 = deactivated 1 = signal 2 = warn 3 = switch off
Th Th
Internal earth fault - response Bit[2] Motor protection - overload response Motor protection - overload response Asymmetry protection response Tripping response I> Warning response I> Tripping response I< Warning response I< Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
Blocking protection - response Bit[2] Reserved Bit[2]
Monitoring the number of Bit[2] starts - response to overshooting Monitoring the number of starts - response to prewarning Monitoring operating hours - response Monitoring stopped time response Ext. fault 1 - response Ext. fault 2 - response Bit[2]
BU1 BU2
19.2
BU1 BU2
19.4 19.6 20.0 20.2
Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
0 0 1 1
Table B-8: Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 20.4 20.6 21.0 21.2 21.4 21.6
Specification Ext. fault 3 - response Ext. fault 4 - response Reserved Basic unit - debounce time inputs Timer 1 - type Timer 2 - type
Type Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
Range 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 0 .. 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3
Unit
Default 1 1 0
Note
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
10 ms
1 0 0
Offset 6 ms 0 = with closing delay, 1 = closing delay with memory, 2 = with OFF delay, 3 = with fleeting closing 0 = non-inverting 1 = inverting 2 = rising edge with memory 3 = falling edge with memory
22.0 22.2 22.4 22.6 23.0 23.2 23.4 23.6 24.0 24.0 24.4 25.0 25.4 26.0 26.4 27.0 27.4 28.0 28.0 29.0 30.0 31.0 32.0
Signal conditioning 1 - type Signal conditioning 2 - type Non-volatile element 1 - type Non-volatile element 2 - type Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bit[4] parameter (24) External fault 1 reset also by External fault 2 reset also by External fault 3 reset also by External fault 4 reset also by Limit monitor - hysteresis for limit monitoring Reserved Reserved Reserved Byte parameters (28) Interner earth fault - delay Overload protection - class Motor protection - delay with overload operation Asymmetry protection level Asymmetry protection delay
Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 Bit[0] = panel reset, Bit[1] = automatic reset, Bit[2] = remote reset, Bit[3] = OFF command reset BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
0 ... 1111B 0 ... 1111B 0 ... 1111B 0 ... 1111B 0 .. 15 1%
1111B 1111B 1111B 1111B 5 0 0 0
0 .. 255 100 ms 5, 10 .. 35, 40 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 .. 100 1% 0 .. 255 100 ms
5 10 5 40 5 BU1 BU2
B-19
Byte.Bit 33.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 37.0 38.0 39.0 40.0 41.0 42.0 43.0 44.0 45.0 46.0 47.0 48.0
Specification Interlocking time F time Tripping level I> Warning level I> Tripping level I< Warning level I< Blocking level Tripping delay I> Warning delay I> Tripping delay I< Warning delay I< Blocking delay Monitoring the number of starts - permitted starts Reserved Reserved Truth table 1 3I/1O - type
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range
Unit
Default 0 5
Note
Info
0 .. 255 1 s 0 .. 255 100 ms
0 = deactivated
0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 .. 255 100 ms 1 .. 255 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 .. 111111 11B 0 .. 111111 11B 0 .. 111111 11B 0 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
49.0
Truth table 2 3I/1O - type
Byte
BU1 BU2
50.0
Byte
BU1 BU2
51.0 52.0 52.0 54.0 56.0 58.0 60.0 62.0 64.0 66.0 68.0 70.0
Reserved Wort parameters (32) Motor protection - cooling down time
Byte Word 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 1s 1s 1h 100 ms 100 ms
0 3000 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = deactivated 0 = deactivated BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
Motor protection - pause time Word Run time Monitoring the number of starts - start time frame Monitoring the number of starts - interlocking time Stopped time level > Timer 1 - limit value Timer 2 - limit value Counter 1 - limit value Counter 2 - limit value Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word
SIMOCODE pro
B-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 72.0 74.0 76.0 76.0 80.0 84.0
Specification Reserved Reserved Part - D-word parameters (36) Operator enables Overload protection set current Ie1
Type Word Word
Range
Unit
Default 0 0
Note
Info
Bit[32]
0 .. 1..1B 10 mA
0..0B 30 0 BU1 BU2
D-word 0 .. 82000
Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 .. 1s 0xFFFFF FFF Reserved D-word
88.0
Grayed fields: parameters can be changed while running.
B-21
B.8
Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 (plug
Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0
Specification Coordination Byte parameters (40) BU - output 1 BU - output 2 BU - output 3 Reserved OP - LED green 1 OP - LED green 2 OP - LED green 3 OP - LED green 4 OP - LED yellow 1 OP - LED yellow 2 OP - LED yellow 3 Reserved Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.1 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.4
Type Byte[4] Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range
Default
Note
Info
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 105 106 107 128 110 Default: status ON < Default: status OFF Default: status ON > Default: signal overload operation Default: status interlocking time active Default: status automatic mode of operation Default: status general fault Default: status general warning
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 OP OP OP OP OP OP OP BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
21.0
Cyclic signaling - bit 0.5
Byte
0 .. 255
120
BU1 BU2
22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0 29.0 30.0 31.0 32.0 33.0
Cyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.7 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.1 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.2 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.3 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.4 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.5 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.6 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.7 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.1
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
96 97 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
Table B-9: Data record 131 - base device parameter 2
SIMOCODE pro
B-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 34.0 35.0 36.0 37.0 38.0 39.0 40.0 41.0 42.0 43.0 44.0 45.0 46.0 47.0 48.0 49.0
Specification Acyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.4 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.5 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.7 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.1 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.2 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.3 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.4 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.5 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.6 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.7 Monitoring PLC/ DCS input Motor protection - emergency start
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60
Note
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
Default: Cyclic controlling bit 0.4
50.0 51.0 52.0
Reserved Reserved Mode selector S1
Byte Byte Byte 0 .. 255
0 0 61 Default: cyclic controlling bit 0.5 Default: fixed level value 1 BU1 BU2
53.0 54.0 55.0 56.0 57.0
Mode selector S2
Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
2 0 0 0 40
BU1 BU2
Control station - local control [LC] ON < Byte Control station - local control [LC] OFF Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON < Byte Byte Control station - local control [LC] ON > Byte
Default: cyclic controlling bit 0.0 Default: cyclic controlling bit 0.1 Default: cyclic controlling bit 0.2
58.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
41
59.0
Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON >
Byte
0 .. 255
42
60.0 61.0 62.0 63.0 64.0 65.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON < Control station - PC[DPV1] OFF Control station - PC[DPV1] ON > Control station - operator panel [OP] ON < Control station - operator panel [OP] OFF Control station - operator panel [OP] ON >
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0
B-23
Byte.Bit 66.0
Specification Control function - ON <
Type Byte
Range 0 .. 255
Default 73
Note Default: general control station ON < Default: general control station OFF Default: general control station ON > Default: status motor current flowing
Info
67.0 68.0
Control function - OFF Control function - ON >
Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255
74 75
69.0
Control function - Feedback ON
Byte
0 .. 255
101
BU1 BU2
70.0 71.0 72.0 73.0 74.0 75.0 76.0 77.0 78.0 79.0
External fault 1 - input External fault 2 - input External fault 3 - input External fault 4 - input External fault 1 - reset External fault 2 - reset External fault 3 - reset External fault 4 - reset Cold starting (TPF) Test 1 - input
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 59 Default: cyclic controlling bit 0.3 Default: cyclic controlling bit 0.6
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
80.0 81.0
Test 2 - input Reset 1 - input
Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 62
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
82.0 83.0 84.0 85.0 86.0 87.0 88.0 89.0 90.0 91.0 92.0 93.0 94.0
Reset 2 - input Reset 3 - input Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 1 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 2 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 3 Truth table 2 3I/1O - input 1 Truth table 2 3I/1O - input 2 Truth table 2 3I/1O - input 3 Truth table 3 3I/1O - input 1
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 95.0 96.0 97.0 98.0 99.0 100.0 101.0 102.0 103.0 104.0 105.0 106.0 107.0 108.0 109.0 110.0 111.0 112.0 113.0 114.0 115.0 116.0 117.0 118.0 119.0 120.0 121.0 122.0 122.0 123.0
Specification Truth table 3 3I/1O - input 2 Truth table 3 3I/1O - input 3 Reserved Timer 1 - input Timer 1 - reset Timer 2 - input Timer 2 - reset Counter 1 - input + Counter 1 - input Counter 1 - reset Counter 2 - input + Counter 2 - input Counter 2 - reset Signal conditioning 1 - input Signal conditioning 1 - reset Signal conditioning 2 - input Signal conditioning 2 - reset Non-volatile element 1 - input Non-volatile element 1 - reset Non-volatile element 2 - input Non-volatile element 2 - reset Flashing 1 - input Flashing 2 - input Flashing 3 - input Flickering 1 - input Flickering 2 - input Flickering 3 - input Analog parameters (44) PLC/DCS analog input Reserved
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
Default 0 0 0
Note
Info BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 Default: max. current I_max
BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2
B-25
B.9
Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1
Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 7.0 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
Specification Coordination Part - bit parameters (17) 3UF50 compatibility mode 3UF50 mode of operation Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog module - measuring range input Analog module - measuring range output Reserved Reserved Limit value 1 Overshooting/ undershooting Limit value 2 Overshooting/ undershooting Limit value 3 Overshooting/ undershooting Limit value 4 Overshooting/ undershooting Reserved OPO level Slider response for OPO Reserved External fault 5 - type External fault 6 - type Reserved Reserved Monitoring external fault 5 Monitoring external fault 6
Type Byte[4] Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Info
0, 1 0, 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = DPV0, 1 = DPV1
BU2 BU2
0, 1 0, 1
0 0 0 0
0 = 0..20 mA 1 = 4-20 mA
AM AM
0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1
0 0 0 0 0
0 =< (overshooting) 1 =< (undershooting)
BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
0, 1 0, 1
0 0 0
0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact 0 = closed, 1 = open 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact
BU2 BU2
0, 1 0, 1
0 0 0 0
BU2 BU2
0, 1 0, 1
0 0
0 = always 1 = only motor ON
BU2 BU2
Table B-10: Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 7.6 7.7 8.0 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 10.0 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.6 11.0 11.2
Specification Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timestamping active Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bit[2] parameters 3UF50 base type Reserved Reserved UVO mode of operation Monitoring tripping U< Monitoring warning U<
Type Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
Range
Unit
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note
Info
0, 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BU2
0, 1, 2
0 0 0
BU2
0, 1 1, 2 1, 2
0 1 1
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated 1 = on+ (always, not TPF) 2 = run (Motor ON, not TPF)
BU2 UM UM
11.4 11.6 12.0
Reserved Reserved Monitoring Tripping 0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3
0 0 0 0 = on (always) 1 = on+ (always, not TPF) 2 = run (motor ON, not TPF) 3 = run+ (motor ON, not TPF, start hiding) AM
Table B-10: Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
B-27
Byte.Bit 12.2 12.4 12.6 13.0 13.2 13.4 13.6 14.0 14.2 14.4 14.6 15.0 15.2 15.4 15.6 16.0 16.2 16.4 16.6 17.0 17.2 17.4 17.6
Specification Monitoring warning 0/4-20 mA> Monitoring tripping 0/4-20 mA< Monitoring warning 0/4-20 mA< Monitoring limit value 1 Monitoring limit value 2 Monitoring limit value 3 Monitoring limit value 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DM - debounce time inputs AM - response with a wire break EM - response to an external earth fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TM - tripping response T> TM - warning response T> TM - response to a sensor error/ out of range TM - active sensor
Type Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
Range 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3
Unit
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note
Info AM AM AM BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
0 .. 3 1, 2, 3 1, 3 0, 1, 2
10 ms
1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
Offset 6ms
DM1 DM2 AM EM EM
1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2
3 2 2 2
0 = deactivated 1 = signal 2 = warn 3 = switch off 0: 1 sensor 1: 2 sensor 3: 3 sensor
TM TM TM TM
SIMOCODE pro
B-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 18.0 18.2 18.4 18.6 19.0 19.2 19.4 19.6 20.0 20.2 20.4 20.6 21.0 21.2 21.4 21.6 22.0 22.2
Specification Tripping response P> Warning response P> Tripping response P< Warning response P< Tripping response cos< Warning response cos< Tripping response U< Warning response U< Warning response 0/4-20 mA> Warning response 0/4-20 mA< Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ext. fault 5 - response Ext. fault 6 - response
Type Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
Range 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 3 0, 1, 2
Unit
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note
Info UM UM UM UM UM
UM UM UM AM AM AM AM
Tripping response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2]
Tripping response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
1 1
BU2 BU2
22.4 22.6 23.0 23.2 23.4 23.6 24.0 24.2 24.4 24.6 25.0 25.2
Reserved Reserved Trace - trigger edge Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timer 3 type Timer 4 - type
Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0,1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = with closing delay, 1 = closing delay with memory, 2 = with OFF delay, 3 = with fleeting closing 0 = non-inverting 1 = inverting 2 = rising edge with memory 3 = falling edge with memory BU2 BU2 0 = positive, 1 = negative BU2
25.4 25.6 26.0 26.2
Signal conditioning 3 - type Signal conditioning 4 - type Non-volatile element 3 - type Non-volatile element 4 - type
Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3
0 0 0 0
BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
B-29
Byte.Bit 26.4 26.6 27.0 27.2 27.4 27.6 28.0 28.0
Specification Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bit[4] parameters (25) TM - sensor type
Type Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[2] Bit[3] +Bit
Range
Unit
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note
Info
000B ... 100B
000B
000B = PT100, 001B = PT1000, 010B = KTY83, 011B = KTY84, 100B = NTC Bit[0] = panel reset, Bit[1] = automatic reset, Bit[2] = remote reset, Bit[3] = OFF command reset
TM
28.4 29.0 29.4
Reserved External fault 5 Reset also by External fault 6 reset also by
Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B 0 .. 1111B
0 0101 1111B BU2 BU2
30.0 30.4 31.0 31.4 32.0 32.4 33.0 33.4 34.0 34.4 35.0 35.4 36.0 36.0 37.0 38.0 39.0 40.0 41.0 42.0 43.0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Truth table 7 2I/1O - type Truth table 8 2I/1O - type Reserved Reserved Hysteresis P - cos phi - U Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Hysteresis free limit values Reserved Byte parameters (29) Reserved EM - delay Level tripping cos< Warning level cos< Tripping level U< Warning level U< Tripping level 0/4-20 mA> Warning level 0/4-20 mA>
Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Bit[4] Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte 0...15 0...15 0...15 0 .. 1111B 0 .. 1111B
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 100 1% 0 .. 100 1% 0 .. 255 8 V 0 .. 255 8 V 0 .. 255 *128 0 .. 255 *128 0 0 0 0 0 0 EM UM UM UM UM AM AM 1% 1% 1% UM AM BU2 BU2 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 44.0 45.0 46.0 47.0 48.0 49.0 50.0 51.0 52.0 53.0 54.0 55.0 56.0 57.0 58.0 59.0 60.0 61.0 62.0 63.0 64.0 65.0 66.0 67.0 68.0 69.0 70.0
Specification Tripping level 0/4-20 mA< Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Tripping delay P> Warning delay P> Tripping delay P< Warning delay P< Tripping level cos< Warning delay cos< Tripping delay U< Warning delay U< Tripping delay 0/4-20 mA> Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Tripping delay 0/4-20 mA< Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Delay limit value 1 Delay limit value 2 Delay limit value 3 Delay limit value 4 TM - hysteresis
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range
Unit
Default 0 0
Note
Info AM AM UM UM UM UM UM UM UM UM AM AM AM AM BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 TM
0 .. 255 *128 0 .. 255 *128
0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 .. 255 1K 0 .. 255 1s 5 20 CF = star-delta starter
Maximum time for star opera- Byte tion UVO time Staggering time Trace-Pretrigger Reserved Reserved Reserved Truth table 4 3I/1O - type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0 .. 255 100 ms 0 0 .. 255 1s 0 .. 20 5% 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. 111111 11B 0 .. 111111 11B 0 .. 111111 11B 0
BU2 BU2 BU2
BU2
71.0
Byte
BU2
72.0
Byte
BU2
73.0 74.0 75.0 76.0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Word parameters (33)
Byte Byte Byte
0 0 0
B-31
Byte.Bit 76.0 78.0 80.0 82.0 84.0 86.0 88.0 90.0 92.0 94.0 96.0 98.0 100.0 102.0 104.0 106.0
Specification Analog module - start value output Analog module - end value output TM - Tripping level T> TM - Warning response T> Limit monitor 1 - limit value Limit monitor 2 - limit value Limit monitor 3 - limit value Limit monitor 4 - limit value Timer 3 - limit value Timer 4 - limit value Counter 3 - limit value Counter 4 - limit value Pause time Reserved Reserved Reserved
Type Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word
Range 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535 0 .. 65535
Unit
Default 0 27648
Note Value for 0/4 mA Value for 20 mA
Info AM AM TM TM BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
1K 1K
0 0 0 0 0 0
100 ms 0 100 ms 0 0 0 10 ms 1 ms 0 100 0 0
BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 108.0 108.0 112.0
Specification Part - D-word parameters (37) Overload protection set current Ie2 Tripping level P>
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Info
D-word 0 .. 82000
10 mA
0 0 UM
D-word 0 .. 1W 0xFFFF FFFF D-word 0 .. 1W 0xFFFF FFFF D-word 0 .. 1W 0xFFFF FFFF D-word 0 .. 1W 0xFFFF FFFF Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B D-word D-word
116.0
Warning level P>
UM
120.0
Tripping level P<
UM
124.0
Warning level P<
UM
128.0 132.0 136.0 140.0
Truth table 9 5I/2O type - output 1 Truth table 9 5I/2O type - output 2 Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 0
BU2 BU2
Grayed fields: parameters can be changed while running.
B-33
B.10
Data record 133 - extended device parameter 2 (plug )
Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0 29.0 30.0 31.0 32.0 33.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 37.0 38.0
Specification Coordination Byte parameter (41) DM1 - output 1 DM1 - output 2 DM2 - output 1 DM2 - output 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timestamping - input 1 Timestamping - input 2 Timestamping - input 3 Timestamping - input 4 Timestamping - input 5 Timestamping - input 6 Timestamping - input 7 Timestamping - input 8 Reserved Reserved
Type Byte[4] Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range
Default
Note
Info
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DM1 DM1 DM2 DM2
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control station - local control [LC] ON<< Byte Control station - local control [LC] ON>> Byte Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<< Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>> Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Control station - operator panel [OP] ON>> Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BU2 BU2
Control station - operator panel [OP]<>/ Byte <<>> Control function - ON<< Control function - ON>> Auxiliary control input - FC Auxiliary control input - FO Auxiliary control input - TC Auxiliary control input - TO External fault 5 - input External fault 6 - input Reserved Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter
SIMOCODE pro
B-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Byte.Bit 39.0 40.0 41.0 42.0 43.0 44.0 45.0 46.0 47.0 48.0 49.0 50.0 51.0 52.0 53.0 54.0 55.0 56.0 57.0 58.0 59.0 60.0 61.0 62.0 63.0 64.0 65.0 66.0 67.0 Reserved
Specification
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range 0 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 0 0 0 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Default
Note
Info
External fault 5 - reset External fault 6 - reset Reserved Reserved UVO error OPO error Truth table 4 3I/1O input 1 Truth table 4 3I/1O input 2 Truth table 4 3I/1O input 3 Truth table 5 3I/1O input 1 Truth table 5 3I/1O input 2 Truth table 5 3I/1O input 3 Truth table 6 3I/1O input 1 Truth table 6 3I/1O input 2 Truth table 6 3I/1O input 3 Truth table 7 2I/1O input 1 Truth table 7 2I/1O input 2 Truth table 8 2I/1O input 1 Truth table 8 2I/1O input 2 Truth table 9 5I/2O input 1 Truth table 9 5I/2O input 2 Truth table 9 5I/2O input 3 Truth table 9 5I/2O input 4 Truth table 9 5I/2O input 5 Timer 3 - input Timer 3 - reset Timer 4 - input Timer 4 - reset
BU2 BU2
BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter (cont.)
B-35
Byte.Bit 68.0 69.0 70.0 71.0 72.0 73.0 74.0 75.0 76.0 77.0 78.0 79.0 80.0 81.0 82.0 83.0 84.0 85.0 86.0 87.0 88.0 88.0 89.0 90.0 91.0 92.0 93.0 94.0 95.0 96.0 97.0 98.0 99.0
Specification Counter 3 - input + Counter 3 - input Counter 3 - reset Counter 4 - input + Timer 4 - input Counter 4 - reset Signal conditioner 3 input Signal conditioner 3 reset Signal conditioner 4 input Signal conditioning 4 - reset Non-volatile element 3 - input Non-volatile element 3 - reset Non-volatile element 4 - input Non-volatile element 4 - reset Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog parameters (45) Analog module - output Analog input limit value 1 Analog input limit value 2 Analog input limit value 3 Analog input limit value 4 Reserved Trace - analog input PLC/DCS analog input 2 PLC/DCS analog input 3 PLC/DCS analog input 4 Reserved Reserved
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Range 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0...255 0...255 0...255 0...255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Default
Note
Info BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
AM BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2
Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.11
Data record 139 - labeling

The diagnostics External fault 1 to 6 (signals, warnings and faults) Limit value 1 to 4 (signals), TM warning T>/ tripping T> (signals, warnings and faults) Warning/ tripping 0/4-20 mA<> (signals, warnings and faults) can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and displayed with SIMOCODE ES, for example. The texts have no functionality.
Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0 140.0 150.0 160.0 170.0 180.0 190.0 Reserved Reserved Labeling - external fault 1 Labeling - external fault 2 Labeling - external fault 3 Labeling - external fault 4 Labeling - external fault 5 Labeling - external fault 6 Reserved Reserved Labeling limit value 1 Labeling limit value 2 Labeling limit value 3 Labeling limit value 4 Labeling TM warning T> Labeling TM tripping T> Labeling warning 0/4-20 mA> Labeling warning 0/4-20 mA< Labeling tripping 0/4-20 mA> Labeling tripping 0/4-20 mA< Reserved Specification Type Byte[4] Byte[6] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] Byte[10] BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2 Information
Table B-12: Data record 139 - labeling
B-37
B.12
Data record 160 - communication parameters

Attention Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automatically. The current baud rate is read.
Byte 0.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 to 11.0 Coordination Station address Baud rate Reserved
Specification
Info
BU1 BU2
Table B-13: Data record 160 - communication parameters
B.13
Data record 165 - comment
Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 36.0 58.0 74.0 112.0 Coordination
Specification
Type Byte[4] Byte[32] Byte[22] Byte[16] Byte[38] Byte[54]
Info
System designation Location identification Date Reserved Comment
BU1 BU2
Table B-14: Data record 165 - comment
SIMOCODE pro
B-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.14
Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling

The acylic control data can be used for any functions. The control data is available as device-internal outputs (sockets).
Description
Byte.Bit 0.0 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6.0 Coordination
Specification
Type Byte[4] Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Word
Info
Acyclic controlling - bit 0.0 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.1 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.2 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.3 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.4 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.5 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.6 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.7 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.0 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.1 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.2 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.3 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.4 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.5 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.6 Acyclic controlling - bit 1.7 Acyclic controlling - analog value
BU1 BU2
Table B-15: Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling
B-39
B.15
Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling

Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic signaling data. The control data is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).
Description
Byte.Bit 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
Specification Acyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.1 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.4 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.5 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.7 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.1 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.2 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.3 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.4 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.5 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.6 Acyclic signaling - bit 1.7 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
Type
Info
BU1 BU2
Table B-16: Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling
SIMOCODE pro
B-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.16
Data record 224 - password protection

Password protection on If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, password protection on and the password are not the same, the signal signal password false is set and no change is carried out. Password protection off If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated. If the password is false, the signal signal - password false is set and no change is carried out.
Description
Byte.Bit 0.0 4 4.1 8.0 16.0 Reserved
Specification
Type Byte[4] Bit Bit[31] Byte[8] Byte[8]
Info
Control flag:0 = password protection off 1 = password protection on Reserved Password Reserved
BU1 BU2
Table B-17: Data record 224 - password protection
B-41
SIMOCODE pro
B-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
In this chapter This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the SIMOCODE pro system components. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
configurators technicians.
Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: good knowledge about configuring switchgear.
C-1
Dimension Drawings
C.1
C.1.1
3UF70 basic unit

SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7 000 basic unit
45
80 106
12
36 86 4
C.1.2
SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7 010 basic unit
5 45 5
80 106
12
65 115 4
SIMOCODE pro
C-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
C.2
C.2.1
3UF710 current measurement module

Current measurement module (push-through converter) 3UF7 100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7 101, 2.4 A up to 25 A
84
45 8
T1 T2 T3
40
38
C-3
Dimension Drawings
C.2.2
Current measurement module (push-through converter) 3UF7 102, 10 A to 100 A
55 14
94
67
T1
T2
65
T3
SIMOCODE pro
C-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
C.2.3
Current measurement module (push-through converter) 3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A
120 95
79 95
140
25
78
C-5
Dimension Drawings
C.2.4
Current measurement module (rail connection) 3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A

120 95 37 9 17
79 95
119 5
47 140
84
SIMOCODE pro
C-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
C.2.5
Current measurement module (rail connection) 3UF7 104, 63 A to 630 A

145 50 11 25
57 125 9 85 122 147
60.5 148
60.5
C-7
Dimension Drawings
C.3
3UF7 200 operator panel
36
29
96
29
SIMOCODE pro
C-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
C.4
3UF7 3 digital module
22.5
68 92 5
10
115
C-9
Dimension Drawings
C.5
C.5.1
Accessories
Door adapter
38.2
45.5
17.4
SIMOCODE pro
C-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
In this chapter This chapter contains the technical data about SIMOCODE pro. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: configurators Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: good knowledge about configuring switchgear
good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
D-1
Technical Data
D.1
In operation
Common technical data

-25 ... +60 C -40 ... +80 C
Permiss. envir. temperature
during storage and transport Site height above sea level < 2000 m < 3000 m < 4000 m Degree of protection (according to 60529) all components (except current measurement module, rail connection, operator panel and door adapter) Current measurement module with rail connection Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover Shock resistance (sine pulse) Installation location Frequencies EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1
max. +50 C (no safe isolation) max. +40 C (no safe isolation)
IP20
IP00 IP54 15 g/11 ms Arbitrary 50/60 Hz 5% corresponds to degree of severity 3

over-voltage limitter is required for inductive loads.
Conducted interference-signal injec- 2 kV (power ports) tion, burst according to IEC 610004-4 1 kV (signal ports) Conducted interference signal injec- 2 kV (line to earth) tion, burst according to IEC 61000- 1 kV (line to earth) 4-5 Electrostatic discharging, ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2 Field-related interference signal according to IEC 61000-4-3 EMC emitted interference according to IEC 60947-1
This is a Class A product. This product can cause radio interference if used in a domestic environment. The user must provide suitable countermeasures if required.
8 kV (air discharge) 6 kV (contact discharge) 10 V/m correponds to degree of severity A DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
Conducted and emitted interference Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1 All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are isolated from each other according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double creepage distance and air gap. Follow the information contained in Test report no. 2668
SIMOCODE pro
D-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
D.2
Basic units
Mounting Display Red/green DEVICE LED
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails or Screw attachment using additional push-in lugs
Green: Ready for operation Red: Function test was negative, device is locked Off: No control supply voltage Continuous light:Communication with PLC/DCS Flashing: Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device Continuous light/flashing: Feeder fault e.g. overload tripping , Resetting the device after tripping Function test (system self-test) Operation of memory module, addressing plug
Green BUS LED
Red GEN. FAULT LED Test/reset button
System interfaces Front Connecting an operator panel or expansion module. In addition, the memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable for parameterization can be connected to the system interface Connecting a current measurement module RS485 9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit) Terminals (1.5 MBit) connection cross section like control circuit Connecting a PROFIBUC DP cable using the cable connection or the 9-pole SUB-D socket 110 - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 0.85 to 1.1 x Us 24 V DC 0.8 to 1.2 x Us
Underside: PROFIBUS DP interface Interface design Connection
Rated control voltage Us (according to DIN EN 61131-2) Operating range Power consumption Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) Basic unit 2 (3UF7010) (including two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2) Rated isolation voltage Ui Rated surge voltage strength Uimp
7 VA 10 VA
5W 7W
300 V (for degree of pollution 3) 4 kV
D-3
Technical Data
Relay outputs: Number Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay outputs 3 monostable relay outputs The isolated NO contacts, of which 2 relay outputs have a common root and one is separate, can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of an operating state). (NC contact response can be parameterized via internal signal conditioning).
Predefined short-circuit protection Fast fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, 10 A for auxiliary contacts (relay out(IEC 60947-5-1) puts) 1.6 A, C-characteristic circuit breaker (IEC 60947-5-1) 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A) circuit breaker Rated uninterrupted current Rated switching capacity 6A AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC 6 A / 120 V AC 3 A / 230 V AC DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC 0.55 A / 60 V DC 0.25 A / 125 V DC Inputs (binary) The 4 inputs with a common root, that are supplied via the device electronics (24 V DC), for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-operated switch, end position switch, ...), can be freely assigned to the control functions. 300 m Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
24 V DC Cable lengths Input characteristic curve Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC) Total cold resistance Response value Return value Cable lengths
< 1.5 kOhm 3.4 to 3.8 kOhm 1.5 to 1.65 kOhm Cross-section: 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 0.5 mm2 Lengths:2x250 m 2x150 m 2x50 m
Connection cross-sections Tightening torque solid stranded, with end sleeves AWG cable 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 1 x (0.5 to 4.0); 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
D-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
D.3
Current measurement modules
Mounting Set current Ie = 0.3 to 3 A; Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails or screw attach2.4 to 25 A; 10 to 100 A (3UF7100, ment via additional plug-in lugs 3UF7101, 3UF7102) Set current Ie = 20 to 200 A (3UF7103) Set current Ie = 63 to 630 A (3UF7104) System interfaces Set current Ie Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails, screw attachment onto mounting plates or directly to the contactor Screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly onto the contactor For connection to a basic unit 3UF7100; 3UF7101; 3UF7102 0.3 to 3 A; 2.4 to 25 A; 10 to 100 A Rated isolation voltage Ui (for degree of pollution 3) Rated surge voltage strength Uimp Measurement frequency Type of current Short-circuit Accuracy of the current measurement Push-through opening Set current 0.3 to 3 A; 2.4 to 25 A: Set current 10 to 100 A; Set current 20 to 200 A; Rail connection 2) Set current Ie Connection screw Tightening torque solid with cable lug multiple wire with cable lug AWG cable 20 to 200 A M8x20 10 to 14 Nm 16 to 95 mm2 3) 25 to 120 mm 6 to 3/0 kcmil
23
3UF7103; 3UF7104 20 to 200 A; 63 to 630 A 1000 V 8 kV
690 V 6 kV 50/60 Hz three-phase current
Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit required1) (in the range 1x the minimum setting current Iu to 8x the maximum set current Io) +/- 3 % Diameter 7.5 mm 14.0 mm 25.0 mm 63 to 630 A M10x30 14 to 24 Nm 50 to 240 mm2 4) ) 70 to 240 mm2 4) 1/0 to 500 kcmil
1) More informationen under http://www.siemens.de/simocode and section D.6 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V on page D-8. 2) Screw connection is possible with a suitable box terminal 3RT19. 3) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs to cables with a cross-section larger than 95 mm2, according to DIN 46235. 4) The 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs to cables with a cross-section larger than 240 mm 2, according to DIN 46234, and to cables larger than 185 mm 2 according to DIN 46235.
D-5
Technical Data
D.4
Expansion modules (digital modules)
Mounting Display Green READY LED
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rail or screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Continuous light:Ready for operation Flashing: No connection to basic unit
System interfaces Rated isolation current Ui Rated surge voltage strength Uimp Relay outputs: Number Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay outputs
For connecting a basic unit or expansion module 300 V (for degree of pollution 3) 4 kV
2 mono or bistable relay outputs (depending on type) The isolated NO contacts of all relay outputs with a common root can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of an operating state). (NC contact response can be parameterized via internal signal conditioning). Fast fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1) 1.6 A, C-characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1) circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A) circuit breaker 6A
Predefined short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs) Rated uninterrupted current Rated switching capacity AC-15
6 A / 24 V AC 6 A / 120 V AC 3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13
2 A / 24 V DC 0.55 A / 60 V DC 0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary)
The 4 externally powered inputs (DC 24 V or 110-240 V AC/ DC), have inputs with a common root dependant on their type. They are used for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-operated switches, end position switches, ...) and can be freely assigned to the control functions. 300 m Type 2 according to EN 61131-2 200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
24 V DC Cable lengths Input characteristic curve 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC Cable lengths Input characteristic curve
SIMOCODE pro
D-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
Connection cross-sections Tightening torque solid stranded, with end sleeves AWG cable 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 1 x (0.5 to 4.0); 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x 20 to 14
D.5
Operator panel
Mounting Display Red/green DEVICE LED
Installing in a switching-cabinet door and/or in a front panel, with system interface covering IP 54
Green: Ready for operation Green, flashing:No connection to basic unit Red: Function test was negative, device is locked Off: No control supply voltage Continuous light: Communication with PLC/DCS Flashing: Baud rate recognized / communication with PC/programming device Continuous light/flashing: Feeder fault , e.g. overload tripping Can be freely assigned to any status signal
Green BUS LED
Red GEN. FAULT LED 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs Buttons Test/reset
Resetting the device after tripping Function test (system self-test) Operation of memory module, addressing plug For controlling the motor feeder, freely assignable
Operation buttons System interfaces Front
For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC cable for parameterization Connection to the basic unit or an expansion module
Rear side
D-7
Status: 05/01/20
Fast fuse links
NH DIAZED NEOZED Type 5SE Type 5SB Type 3NA
3)
D-8
690V
D.6
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders. designed for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V for 3UF7
CLASS
Operating class
Overload relay Contactor
Technical Data
Setting range (Type)

gL(gG)
5)
5 u.10
Rated operating current Ie/AC-3 in A for Test current "r"
/ 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V
15
20
25
30
35
40
400V / 500V
Type of assignment 1 2
0.3 - 3.0A / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 12,0 15,0 15,0 20,3 25,0 20,3 28,0 29,4 45,0 47,0 53,0 74,8 97,5 74,8 / 74,8 / 74,8 69,0 / 98 / 98 / 98 90 / 120 / 120 / 120 111 / / / / / / / / / 20,3 28,0 29,4 45,0 47,0 53,0 74,8 97,5 / / / / / / / / 20,0 24,0 24,0 45,0 47,0 53,0 74,8 97,5 19,1 26,5 26,5 41,7 45,0 50,0 69,0 90,0 / / / / / / / / 19,1 26,5 26,5 41,7 45,0 50,0 69,0 90,0 / / / / / / / / 19,1 24,0 24,0 41,7 45,0 50,0 69,0 90,0 17,6 25,0 25,0 38,2 43,0 47,0 63,0 82,0 / / / / / / / / 17,6 25,0 25,0 38,2 43,0 47,0 63,0 82,0 / / / / / / / / 17,6 24,0 24,0 38,2 43,0 47,0 63,0 82,0 16,1 23,5 23,5 34,5 40,0 44,0 57,0 74,0 / / / / / / / / 16,1 23,5 23,5 34,5 40,0 44,0 57,0 74,0 / / / / / / / / / / / / / 12,0 15,0 15,0 20,3 25,0 / / / / / 9,0 13,0 13,0 20,3 24,0 12,0 14,0 14,0 19,1 25,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 / 14,0 / 13,0 13,0 / 13,0 / 13,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 12,0 / 14,0 / 13,0 13,0 / 13,0 / 13,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 12,0 / 19,1 / 19,1 17,6 / 17,6 / 17,6 16,1 / 16,1 / 16,1 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 16,1 23,5 23,5 34,5 40,0 44,0 57,0 74,0 / / / / / / / 20,0 24,0 24,0 47,0 58,0 58,0 100,0 25,5 33,0 38,5 56,0 61,0 69,0 93,2 100,0 93,2 122 150 / / / 93,2 122 150 / / / 93,2 122 150 81,7 107 131 / / / 81,7 107 131 / / / 81,7 107 131 / 25,5 / 33,0 / 38,5 / 56,0 / 61,0 / 69,0 / 93,2 / 100,0 / 20,0 / 24,0 / 24,0 / 47,0 / 58,0 / 58,0 / 93,2 / 100,0 22,3 29,4 32,7 49,0 53,0 59,0 81,7 100,0 / 22,3 / 29,4 / 32,7 / 49,0 / 53,0 / 59,0 / 81,7 / 100,0 / / / / / / / / 20,0 24,0 24,0 47,0 53,0 58,0 81,7 100,0 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 32,0 / 40,0 / 50,0 / 65,0 / 80,0 / 95,0 / 100,0 5,0 6,5 9,0 6,5 12,0 17,0 18,0 25,0 25,0 / 4,0 5,2 6,3 5,2 9,0 13,0 13,0 20,0 24,0 7,0 9,0 11,0 9,0 12,0 17,0 18,0 25,0 25,0 / / / / / / / / / 5,0 6,5 9,0 6,5 12,0 17,0 18,0 25,0 25,0 / 4,0 5,2 6,3 5,2 9,0 13,0 13,0 20,0 24,0 7,0 9,0 10,0 9,0 12,0 16,0 16,0 22,3 25,0 / / / / / / / / / 5,0 6,5 9,0 6,5 12,0 16,0 16,0 22,3 25,0 / 4,0 5,2 6,3 5,2 9,0 13,0 13,0 20,0 24,0 7,0 9,0 9,5 / 5,0 / 4,0 / 6,5 5,2 / 9,0 / 6,3 7,0 9,0 9,0 / / / 5,0 6,5 9,0 / 4,0 5,2 / 6,3 7,0 9,0 9,0 / / / 5,0 6,5 9,0 / 4,0 / 5,2 / 6,3 7,0 8,5 8,5 / / / 5,0 6,5 8,5 / 4,0 5,2 / 6,3 35 35 35 63 63 63 100 125 125 125 125 160 200 200 200 355 355 355 355 355 74 93 126 146 165 220 275 152 180 204 / / / / / / / / 340 / 344 / 572 / 572 531 / 531 / 531 500 / 500 / 500 469 / 126 146 165 220 275 152 180 204 / / / / / / / / 126 146 165 220 275 152 180 204 340 / 340 344 / 344 469 / 469 / / 74 93 / 74 / 93
3RT1015 3RT1016
3,0 3,0 35 35
/ /
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
3,0 3,0
/ 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
/ 3,0 / 3,0
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
/ 3,0 / 3,0
3,0 3,0
/ /
3,0 3,0
/ 3,0 / 3,0
20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 35 63 63 63 63 80 125 160 160 315 315 315 315 315
2.4 - 25A
3RT1015 3RT1016 3RT1017 3RT1023 3RT1024 3RT1025 3RT1026 3RT1034 3RT1035
7,0 9,0 12,0 9,0 12,0 17,0 25,0 25,0 25,0
10-100A
3RT1034 3RT1035 3RT1036 3RT1044 3RT1045 3RT1046 3RT1054 3RT1055 / 115,0 / 115,0 / 150 / 150 / 185 / 170
32,0 40,0 50,0 65,0 80,0 95,0 100,0
20-200A
3RT1054 3RT1055 3RT1056
115,0 150 185
69,0 / 69,0 64,0 / 64,0 / 64,0 90 / 90 82 / 82 / 82 111 / 111 102 / 102 / 102
63-630A
3RT1064 3RT1065 3RT1066 3RT1075 3RT1076 3RT1264 3RT1265 3RT1266 3RT1275 3RT1276 3TF68 2) / 630 / 630 630 / 630 / 630 572 /
225 265 300 400 500 225 265 300 400 500 630
/ / / / / / / / / / /
225 265 300 400 500 225 265 300 400 500 630
/ / / / / / / / / / /
225 265 280 400 450 225 265 300 400 500 630
182 215 243 324 405 225 265 300 400 500 502
/ / / / / / / / / / /
182 215 243 324 405 225 265 300 400 500 502
/ / / / / / / / / / /
182 215 243 324 405 225 265 300 400 500 502
160 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440
/ / / / / / / / / / /
160 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440
/ / / / / / / / / / /
160 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440
146 172 195 260 325 194 228 258 344 430 408
/ / / / / / / / / / /
146 172 195 260 325 194 228 258 344 430 408
/ / / / / / / / / / /
146 172 195 260 325 194 228 258 344 430 408
135 159 180 240 300 173 204 231 316 385 376
/ / / / / / / / / / /
135 159 180 240 300 173 204 231 316 385 376
/ / / / / / / / / / /
135 159 180 240 300 173 204 231 316 385 376
133 150 200 250 131 156 177
/ / / / / / / 316 / 317 / 438 /
133 150 200 250 131 156 177
/ / / / / / /
133 150 200 250 131 156 177 316 / 316 317 / 317 438 / 438
5) Assignment and short-circuit units according to IEC60947-4-1. Type of assignment "1" : Scontactor or starter must not damage people or the plant if a short-circuit occurs. It does not need to be possible to continue operating without repairs or replacement parts. Type of assignment "2" : Contactor or starter must not damage people or the plant if a short-circuit occurs. and must be ready for further use. The danger of contact welding is given.
500 500 500 630 630 500 500 500 800 800 800 800
400 400 400 400 500 500 500 500 800 800 5004) 6304)
3TF69 2)
630
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
SIMOCODE pro
1) Contactor installation possible (after disconnecting the box terminal block) 2) No contactor installation possible 3) Adhere to the operating voltage 4) Ensure that the safety separation between the maximum AC-3 operatingcurrent and the rated fuse current is sufficiently large.
Index
Numerics 9-pole SUB-D connection
11-16
A Abbreviations and Specifications A-3, B-3 Accessories 1-18, 1-25 Active control stations A-2 Acyclic writing 10-5 writing and reading of data records 10-10 Addressing plug 1-18, 1-20, 1-25, 2-11, 11-14, 12-4 Alarms 10-19 Analog input 1-24 Analog module 1-2, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24 Analog output 1-24 Asymmetry limit 3-9 Asymmetry monitoring 3-9 Asymmetry protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-9 B Basic device parameter 10-20 basic factory default settings 2-2, 12-2 Basic unit pin assignment 11-7 Basic units 1-10, 1-19 Blocking limit 3-10 Blocking protection 3-2, 3-3, 3-10 Bus termination module 11-17 Buttons D-7 Byte arrangements B-2 C Cable cross-section 11-6 Cable lengths D-4 Channel-related diagnostics 10-18 Checklist for selecting the device series 1-8 Circuit breaker 1-12, 1-19, 4-12, 4-22, 4-23 Class 1 master 10-2 Class 2 master 10-2 Class interval 3-10 Clockwise rotation 4-28 Color-coding on the connecting cable 11-13, 11-15
Comment 10-20 Commissioning 2-9, 12-1, 12-2, 12-3 Communication 1-13, 10-1 Communication parameters 10-20 Communication principle 10-4 Configuration with SIMOCODE pro V 11-11 Configuring a Reversing Starter 2-1 SIMOCODE pro 10-6 the slave diagnostics 10-12 with a GSD file 10-6 with SIMATIC PDM 10-8 with the SIMOCODE ES software 10-8 Connecting cable 1-18, 1-25 Connecting plugs with sockets 1-28 Connecting SIMOCODE pro as a norm slave with a GSD file 10-6 Connection cross-sections D-4 Contactor controls 2-7, A-2 Control commands 4-1, 4-25, 4-28, 4-32, 4-38, 4-41, 4-51 Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-27 Control function 1-12, 4-1, 4-2, 4-10 Control programs 1-2 Control station - local control 4-3 - operator panel 4-4 - PC 4-4 - PLC/DCS 4-3 Control stations 4-1 Cooling down time 1-14 Cooling time 3-7 Cos phi 1-22 Counter-clockwise rotation 4-28 Counters 1-15, 9-2, 9-8 Cover for IP54 1-20 Covering 11-14 Current limit 1-11, 3-10 Current measurement modules 1-16, 1-21, 11-9, D-5 Current measurement with current measurement modules 11-9 Current transformer 3-4
Index-1
Index
Current/voltage measurement module 1-2, 1-16, 1-22 Cyclic controlling 10-9 services 1-13 signaling 10-9 signaling data 2-12 data transfer 10-5 D Dahlander 1-12, 4-12, 4-32 to 4-34 Dahlander circuit 4-33 Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-35, 4-36, 4-37, 4-43, 4-50 Data Formats and Data Records B-1 Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 B-16 Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 B-22 Data record 133 - extended device parameter 2 B-34 Data record 139 - labeling B-37 Data record 160 - communication parameters B-38 Data record 165 - comment B-38 Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling B-39 Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling B-40 Data record 224 - password protection B-41 Data record 67 B-4 Data record 67 - process image of the outputs B-4 Data record 69 - process image of the inputs B-5 Data record 92 - device diagnostics B-6 Data record 94 - measured values B-14 Data record 95 - Service/statistics data B-15 Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 B-26 Data records - overview 10-20, B-1 Data records (acyclic data) 10-10 Degree of protection (according to 60529) D-2 Delay pre-warning 3-8 Detachable terminals 11-2 for basic units and expansion modules 11-6 Device diagnostics 10-20 Device series 1-2 Diagnostic alarm 10-19 Diagnostic data 1-14 Diagnostics with STEP 7 10-11 Digital module pin assignment 11-8
Digital modules 1-17, 1-23 Dimension Drawings C-1 Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-12, 4-12, 4-17 Display D-3, D-6, D-7 Display and statistics data 10-20 Door adapter 1-18, 1-25 DP master 10-2 DPV1 slave 10-2 E Earth-fault detection 1-2 Earth-fault module 1-11, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24 Earth-fault monitoring 1-10, 1-17, 1-24 EEx e applications 3-6, 3-12 EMC emitted interference according to IEC 60947-1 D-2 EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1 D-2 Emergency start 1-13 Enabled control command 4-31, 4-45, 4-55 Enables 4-1, 4-8 End position 4-45 Error types 10-18 Execution time 4-14, 4-40, 4-45, 4-52 Expansion modules 1-23, D-6 Extended device parameter 10-20 F Fault feedback 4-14 Feedback ON 4-13, 4-14, 4-41 Feedback time 4-14, 4-40, 4-52 Fill level 1-6 Fixing lugs for screw attachments Flashing 1-15, 9-2, 9-19 Flickering 1-15, 9-2, 9-20 Free acyclic control data 10-20 signaling data 10-20 Function blocks 1-27 G GSD (device data) 10-2 GSD file 1-26, 10-6, 10-7 I Identification-related diagnostics 10-16 Independent operation 1-3 Input characteristic curve D-4 Inputs (binary) D-6 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS D 11-17 Installation location D-2 Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software 10-7 Integration in STEP7 10-8 Interfaces 11-1
11-2
Index-2
Index
Interlocking time
4-13, 4-14, 4-19 4-5
K Key-operated switch operation
L Labeling 10-20 Lamp controls A-2 Local control 2-8 Left - fast 4-35 Left - slow 4-35 Limit monitor 1-15, 9-2, 9-21, 9-23 Limit overshooting 9-21 Limit temperature 3-11 Limit undershooting 9-21 Linking function blocks 2-7 Load type 3-8, 4-13, 4-40, 4-52 Local 4-5, 4-6 Local control station 2-2, 2-3, 2-9 Locking the contactor 4-13 Logic Modules 1-15, 9-1 M Making internal assignments 4-51, 4-54 Manual operation 4-5 Manufacturer's identification 10-15 Master PROFIBUS address 10-15 Measured values 10-20 Measurement frequency D-5 Measurement module D-3 Memory module 1-18, 1-20, 1-25, 11-14 Mode selectors 4-5, 4-6 Modes of operation 4-1, 4-6 Monitoring 1-10 Monitoring active power 1-11 analog signals 1-11 PLC/DCS 1-13 temperature 1-17 the power factor (cos phi) 1-11 Motor control functions 1-19 Motor feeder 1-4, 1-5, 2-3 Motor operating hours 1-14 Motor power/cos phi 1-14 Motor protection functions 3-2 Motor stop times 1-14 Motor switching state 1-14 Motor temperature 1-10, 1-14 Mounting 11-1, D-3, D-5, D-6, D-7 mounting lugs 11-2, 11-3, 11-4 Mounting the basic units and expansion modules 11-3 the current measurement modules 11-4 the operator panel 11-5 Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces 11-1
N Network contactor, clockwise rotation 4-28 Non-maintained command mode 4-13, 4-40, 4-45, 4-52 Non-volatile elements 1-15, 9-2, 9-16 NOR function 9-15, 9-18 Norm diagnostics 10-5, 10-9 Notes on parameterizing 12-2 Number of motor starts 1-14 of overload trippings 1-14 of start-ups 1-12 O Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro 1-18, 1-26, 10-2, 10-8 OM SIMOCODE ES Professional 10-10 ON control command 4-45 Operating data 1-14 Operating hours 1-12 Operating range D-3 Operational protection off (OPO) 1-13 Operator enable of the individual control stations 4-7 Operator panel 1-16, 1-20, 11-14, D-7 Overload 3-6 Overload protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2 to 3-4, 3-10 Overload relay 1-12, 4-12, 4-16 Overview of system components 1-16 P Parameter block 10-8 Parameter dependences in the GSD 10-7 Parameterization 2-7 parameterization software 1-26 Parameterization starting 10-5 Password protection 10-20 Pause time 3-7 PC cable 1-18, 1-25, 11-14 PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro 1-26 Phase asymmetry 1-10, 1-14, 3-9 Phase currents 1-14 Phase cycle 1-14, 1-22 Phase failure 1-10 Phase voltages 1-14 Pin assignment 11-7, 11-8 Pin cross-section 11-9 PLC/DCS 4-5 Plugs (analog) 1-27 Plugs (digital) 1-27 Pole-changing switches 1-12, 1-19, 4-12, 4-38, 4-39 with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-41, 4-42
Index-3
Index
Power consumption D-3 Power failure monitoring (UVO) 1-13 Preventive maintenance 12-6 Pre-warning 3-8 Process alarm 10-19 Process and diagnostic alarm 10-5, 10-9 Process image (cyclic data) 10-10 Process image of the inputs 10-20 of the outputs 10-20 Process monitoring 1-11 PROFIBUS DP 1-13, 1-18, 2-2, 4-51, 4-53, 10-2 PROFIBUS DP interface 1-13, D-3 on a 9-pole SUB-D socket 11-16 PROFIBUS DPV1 10-2 PTC 3-11 Pump 1-11 Push-through opening 11-9, D-5 Push-through system 1-16, 11-9 R Rail connection 11-9, D-5 Rail mounting 11-4 Rated control voltage D-3 isolation current D-6 isolation voltage D-3, D-5 surge voltage strength D-3, D-5, D-6 switching capacity D-6 uninterrupted current D-6 Reading data 10-3 Reading out statistic data 12-6 the diagnostics 10-11 the statistics data 12-6 Relay outputs D-4, D-6 Remote operation 4-5 Remote/automatic 4-5 Replacing a basic unit 12-9 Replacing expansion units 12-9 Reset 1-13, 3-8 Responses 3-3 Reversing Starter 1-12, 2-2, 4-8, 4-12, 4-19, 4-20 Right - fast 4-35 Right - slow 4-35 S Save switching command 4-13 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit 12-8 from the basic unit in a SIMOCODE ES file 12-7
from the basic unit in the memory module 12-7 from the memory module in the basic unit 12-8 Screw attachment 11-2 to 11-4 Screw terminals 1-27 Sensor circuit error 3-12 Sensor measuring circuits 1-11 Sensors 1-17, 1-24 Sequence for connecting the system interface 11-13, 11-15 for PROFIBUS DP connection 11-16 Service data 1-14 Servicing 12-1 Set current D-5 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10, 2-11 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES 2-11 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug 2-11 Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2 Short-circuit protection D-4 Signal conditioner 1-15, 9-2, 9-13 Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP 1-27 SIMARIS manager 10-2 SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 10-8 SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 10-2 SIMATIC S7 1-26, 10-7 SIMATIC S7-400 10-8 SIMOCODE ES 1-18, 1-26, 2-2, 2-11, 4-1, 4-4, 8-18, 10-2, 10-5, 10-8, 12-2, 12-4, 12-7, B-37 SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-25 SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 10-3 Slave modes of operation 10-5 Slide control 1-19, 4-49 Slider 1-12, 4-12, 4-46, 4-48 Snap-on mounting 11-3 Socket assignment table - analog A-11 - digital A-4 Sockets (analog) 1-27 Sockets (digital) 1-27 Soft reversing starter 4-12, 4-53, 4-54 Soft starter 1-12, 4-12, 4-51, 4-52 Soft starter control, 1-19 Standard function modules 1-13 Star contactor 4-28 Star-delta circuit 1-10 Star-delta connection 4-29 Star-delta starter 4-12, 4-26 with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-28, 4-30 Star-delta starters 1-12, 1-19, 4-25
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02
Index
Starting up parameter data 10-10 Start-up parameterization 10-8, 10-10 Start-up time 3-4 Station status 1 10-13 Station status 2 10-14 Station status 3 10-14 Statistics data 12-6 Status messages 10-5, 10-9, 10-17 Status signals/messages A-2 STEP 7 user program 10-11 Stop time 1-12 Strip length 11-6 Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-11, 1-17, 1-24 Switch off time 3-4 Switching from star to delta 4-25, 4-28 Switching interval 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-38, 4-40 Switching the direction of rotation 4-19, 4-28, 4-35, 4-41, 4-53 the direction of travel 4-47 the speed 4-32, 4-35, 4-38, 4-41 System interface 1-16, 11-13 System interface cover 1-18, 1-25, 11-12 System interfaces 11-10, 11-14, D-3, D-5, D-6, D-7 T T module 3-11 Tables A-1 Technical Data D-1 Telegram description 10-9 Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24 Temperature monitoring 1-11, 1-24, 3-11, 3-12 Temperature sensors 1-2 Test position feedback (TPF) 1-13 Test/reset button D-3 Thermistor protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-12, D-4 Thermistor sensors 1-10, 3-11 Tightening torques 11-6 Time stamping in the fault memory 8-18 Time synchronization 1-13 Time to trip 1-14 Timer 1-15, 9-2, 9-10 Timestamping 1-13, 8-18 Torque 4-49 Transferring the parameters to the basic device 2-9 Transmitting data 10-4 Tripping class 3-4, 3-5 Tripping time 3-5 Truth table for 2I/1O 9-6 Truth table for 3I/1O 9-3
Truth table for 5I/2O 9-7 Truth tables 1-15, 9-2 Types of sensors 3-11 Types of signal 9-17 Types of signals 9-14 U Unit replacement 1-25
V Valve 1-12, 4-12, 4-44, 4-45 Valve control 1-19 Variants for slide control 4-49 Voltage monitoring 1-11 W Warnings 1-13, 1-14 Watchdog 1-13 Win SIMOCODE DP Converter 1-26 Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-26 Wiring 11-1, 11-6 the detachable terminals 11-7, 11-8 Writing data 10-3
Index-5
Index
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02
Sender (please complete) Name
Comany / department
To SIEMENS AG A&D CD MM3
Address
Telephone
92220 Amberg, Germany

Fax:
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual
Did you notice an error while reading this manual? If so, please let us know using this form. We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automation and Drives Low Voltage Controls and Distribution Postfach 4848 D-90327 Nrnberg w w w . s i e m e n s.com/simocode Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Safety and Commissioning Information for Potentially Explosive Areas

In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for potentially explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information when you have to protect motors in potentially explosive areas. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
planners and configurators commissioners maintenance and service personnel
Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge:

explosion protection EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially explosive/hazardous areas with gas EN 50281-1-2 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially explosive/hazardous areas with dust VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in underground mines
E-1
E.1
General
The increased danger in potentially explosive areas makes the careful observance of the following notes and standards necessary:
EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially explosive/hazardous areas with gas EN 50281-1-2 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially explosive/hazardous areas with dust VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in underground mines
Information and standards
All 3UF7 devices are certified under Device Group I, Category M2 (mining) and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area GD (areas in which explosive gas, steam, fog and air mixtures, as well as inflammable dust, are present): BVS 04 ATEX F 003 BVS 04 ATEX F 003 I (M2) II (2) GD
Warning All work for connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by qualified, responsible personnel. Unprofessional behavior can cause serious damage to persons and goods.
SIMOCODE pro
E-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2
Setting up and commissioning

Attention Follow the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices) SIMOCODE pro Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1 Current measurement module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1 Current/voltage measurement Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1 module Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
E.2.1
Setting the rated current of the motor Configure the 3UF7 to the rated current of the motor (according to the type plate or design test certificate of the motor). Attention Note the release class/release characteristic curve of the 3UF7. Select the release class so that the motor is also thermally protected even with a blocked rotor. Motors, cables and contactors must be designed for the selected release class.
Attention Set the response of the overload protection to Switch off!
E-3
Example Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s, IA/Ie = 5.5:
TE = 11 s
IA/Ie = 5.5
Fig. 5-1: Switch-off conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
SIMOCODE pro
E-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2.2
3UF70 with thermistor input For the 3UF70 you can use a type A temperature sensor with a characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082. Depending on the number of sensors, this results in the following release and restart temperatures:
Fig. 5-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following release and restart temperatures result in relation to the NFT (nominal functioning temperature of the sensor):
Release temperature 3 sensors 6 sensors NFT + 4 K NFT - 5 K Restart temperature NFT - 7 K NFT - 20 K
Table 5-1: Release and restart temperatures
The specified temperatures are limit values.
Attention Set the response of the activated thermistor to Switch off!
E-5
E.2.3
Wiring of the sensor circuit
Caution Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. The use of conductors of the motor feeder or other main current cables is not permitted. Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interferences are to be expected due to parallel heavy current cables. Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:
Cable cross section Cable lengths at the thermistor input without short-circuit recognition 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 0.5 mm2 2x 2800 m 2x 1500 m 2x 500 m with short-circuit recognition 1)
2x 250 m 2x 150 m 2x 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit is recognized up to this maximum cable length.
Table 5-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
It is recommended to evaluate the short-circuit recognition. If the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried out (mounting, demounting the system). The sensor circuit must be checked for short circuits when the resistances are < 50 Ohm. E.2.4 Short-circuit protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for type of coordination 2 The short-circuit protection must be ensured by separate overcurrent protection devices.
Caution Note the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of coordination 2 when combining with other contactors.
SIMOCODE pro
E-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2.5
Cable protection
Caution Avoid impermissable high surface temperatures of the cables by correctly dimensioning the cross sections! Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20 to CLASS 40!
E.2.6
Test Carry out a test when commissioning and cyclically every 12 months at the latest! The test comprises a complete function test. All three test phases (see below) must be carried out. These include hardware test, current measurement in all phases used and switching off the motor contactors (complete control chain with motor supply). The measured current values must be checked! Attention: The test must be carried out by a professional who knows the specified standards!
Test phases
Phase 1: hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s): The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are activated, as are the lamp controls. The contactor controls remain unchanged. Phase 2: hardware test results (2 to 5 s): If there is an fault, the HW fault basic unit fault is triggered. If there is no fault, the GEN. FAULT LED flashes if no main current is flowing the GEN. FAULT LED flickers if main current flows in all three phases (special case: for 1-phase load in one phase). Phase 3: relay test (> 5 s): If a test is implemented with switch-off, the contactor controls are deactivated.
E-7
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the TEST/ RESET button is pressed for the respective period of time: Test phase Status Without main current
O.K. Fault *)
With main current

O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test DEVICE LED < 2s GEN.FAULT LED Contactor control Show QL* Hardware test / lamp test result DEVICE LED 2s - 5s GEN.FAULT LED Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated Green Red Green Red Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Green Green Green Green
Relay test DEVICE LED > 5s GEN.FAULT LED Contactor control LED lit/activated Deactivated Deactivated LED flickering Deactivated LED off Deactivated Green Red Green Red
LED flashing
*) Fault displayed after 2 s

Table 5-3: Statuses of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
SIMOCODE pro
E-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2.7
Further safety information
Caution Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable digital module may be used for the protection function!
Warning The 3UF7 is not suitable for set-up in potentially explosive areas. The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet which has at least the IP 4x degree of protection. When setting up in potentially explosive areas, the 3UF7 may not cause any danger of fire. Corresponding measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).
Caution SIMOCODE pro C - basic unit 1: Short-term energy failures (voltage failures < approx. 50 ms) do not lead to any failure of the protection system. Long-term energy failures (voltage failures > approx. 50 ms) lead to deactivation of the relay outputs. SIMOCODE pro V - basic unit 2: Short-term energy failures (voltage failures < approx. 200 ms) do not lead to any failure of the protection system. Long-term energy failures (voltage failures > approx. 200 ms) lead to deactivation of the relay outputs. If the 3UF7 is in the Automatic RESET mode of operation, the reset is done automatically after the cooling down time has expired without pressing the RESET button. It must be guaranteed here via an additional ON button that the motor does not automatically start after tripping. If the 3UF7 is used in this case without additional thermistor protection, the motor may only be switched on by professionals.
Warning The Automatic RESET mode of operation may not be used in applications in which an unexpected restart can lead to damage to persons or objects.
Attention: The 3UF7 is not suitable for the load-side operation of frequency converters.
E-9
E.2.8
Ambient conditions Range of the permitted ambient temperature:

Storage/transport: Operation: -40 C to +80 C -25 C to +60 C
E.3
Maintenance and repair

The devices are maintenance-free. Warning Repairs on the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
E.4
Guarantee
The guarantee presumes the observance of this safety and commissioning information of the operating instructions SIMOCODE pro Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1 Current measurement module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1 Current/voltage measurement Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1 module Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1 and the complete manual Order number 3UF7970-0AA0x-0
E.5
Further information
You can find further information on the 3UF7 in the LV10 Siemens catalog Switchgear for Industry or on the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/cd.
SIMOCODE pro
E-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Simocode Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Simocode Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simocode Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Manual Version 10/2004

Siemens AG 2004 Technical data subject to change

. 2-2 . 2-3 . 2-6 . 2-10 3-1

. 3-2 . 3-4 . 3-9 . 3-10 . 3-11 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-5

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data

record record record record record record record record

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Basic unit (BU1)

Basic unit (BU2) Digital module (DM) Analog module (AM)

Current measurement module (IM)

Operator panel (OP)

Additional optional expansions are possible

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Control station local control [LC]

S0 Current measurment module (IM) A1 A2 IN1

Basic unit (BU)

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V L1 L2 L3 N PE

Fill-level indicator L1/L+

1 3 5 Q1 F11 Control station local control [LC]

2 4 6 Current measurement module (IM) System interface A1 A2

Basic unit (BU 2)

In+ Control station In Analog module (AM) Operator panel

Out Display Motor current

Optional: Laptop with SIMOCODE ES

Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Checklist for selecting the device series

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro Requirement pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Overview of system components

Operator panel (OP)

Current measurement modules (IM) 63 A up to 630 A

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Earth-fault module (EM) *